Wop d2#

Graphic Programming System
Turning
Software Version 6
Part 2: Operator and
Programming Functions
User’s Guide 09.96 Edition
User Documentation
SINUMERIK 840C / OEM Version for Windows
General Documentation User/Manufacturer/

Service Docum.
ACR 20/
ACR 20/
840C 840C Accessories
Accessories 805SM/840C
805SM/840C
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
Brochure Catalog NC 36 Catalog NC Z Link to SINEC L2-DP with

Module
IM328-N, Slave
IM329-N, Master and Slave
User Documentation
SINUMERIK
840/840C/
SINUMERIK 840/840C/850/
840C
840C 840C 880/880 GA2 880/880 GA2 840C
840C 840C
840C
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
Operator’s Guide Programming User’s Guide Cycles, Measuring Cycles User’s Guide
OEM Version for Guide Graphic Programming System Programming Version 20 Simulation Milling
Windows Drilling/Boring and Milling User’s Guide and Turning
Parts 1+2 Guide
Standard
Turning Parts 1+2
Diagnostics Guide On PC
Environment Description 840C
Manufacturer Documentation
840/840C/ 840/840C/ 840/840C/

840C 880/880 GA2 880/880 GA2 880/880 GA2
800 840C 840C
840C
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840/880
840/880
Interface: Function Block PLC 135 WB/WB2/SD SINUMERIK Planning Guide OEM Version for
Signals Packages Quick Reference, WS 800A Graphic Windows
Connection Function Macros Planning CL800 Cycle Language Programming System User’s Guide
Conditions S5-HLL User’s Guide Alarm Dialog for PC
Manufacturer Documentation Service Documentation
840C 840/840C/ 840/840C/ 840/840C/

SINUMERIK 840/840C/
840/840C/850/
SINUMERIK 880/880 GA2 880/880GA2
880/880 GA2
840D/611D 880/880 GA2 880/880 GA2 SINUMERIK 840C
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
Description of Computer Link Computer Link Installation Guide Measuring Cycles Spare Parts List
Functions SINT Message Frame Instructions Version 20
Safety Integrated SIN PS 231 Descripiton Lists
SIN PS 315 Start-up Guide
General Description Difference Description
Windows
Introduction 1
Graphic Programming System

Software Version 6
Turning Help Function 2
Part 2: Operator and
Programming Functions
User’s Guide
Operation 3
User Documentation
Programming Functions 4
Valid for
Control Software Version Appendix 5

SINUMERIK 840C/CE as from SW3
(Standard/Export version)
Index 6
09.96 Edition
SINUMERIK documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” column.
Status code in the “Remarks” column:
A . . . . New documentation
B . . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C . . . . Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition,
this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
Edition Order No. Remarks

12.93 6FC5198–3AA40–0BP0 A
04.94 6FC5198–3AA40–0BP1 C
08.94 6FC5198–4AA40–0BP0 C
11.94 6FC5198–5AA40–0BP0 C
03.95 6FC5198–5AA40–0BP1 C
11.95 6FC5198–6AA40–0BP0 C
09.96 6FC5198–6AA40–0BP1 C
Siemens quality for software and training to DIN ISO 9001, Reg. No. 2160–01
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply
such functions with a new control or when servicing.
This publication was produced with Interleaf V 5.3
Subject to changes without prior notice.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
 Siemens AG 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996. All rights reserved.
Order No. 6FC5198–6AA40–0BP1 Siemens–Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Remarks
The documentation for your Graphic Programming System is divided

into three parts.
S “User’s Guide for Graphic Programming System Part 1: Program-
ming Examples”
S “User’s Guide for Graphic Programming System Part 2: Operator
and Programming Functions”
S “Environment Description for Graphic Programming System”
This “User’s Guide for Graphic Programming System Part 2” de-
scribes the turning technology with
S detailed information about the operator control element func-
tions and
S underlining special features of programming with the Graphic
Programming System.
Please consult Section 4.5 if you are programming for a vertical boring and
turning mill.
For programming face and peripheral surfaces, please refer to Sections
4.9, 4.11 and 5.3.
Note Before using the functions with the Graphic Programming System, you
should work through the programming examples in Part 1 and read
through Part 2 of the User’s Guide carefully.
This User’s Guide does not contain a detailed des-

cription of all functions available in the system and
of all possible operator inputs.
The Graphic Programming System features a
powerful help function, which is available in almost
all situations.
This manual “Part 2: Operator and Programming Functions” is
structured as follows:
Section 1: Provides you with an overview.
Introduction
Section 2: Describes how you call up descriptions relating to the functions of the
Help Function softkey menus and drawings for the various parameters directly onto
the screen as an additional information service.
Section 3: Describes the general means of operation and the display in the
Operation Graphic Programming System.
Section 4: Provides information on the functions of the Graphic Programming Sys-

Programming Func- tem. Some of the functions are described in detail.
tions
Section 5: Provides an overview of the menu trees of the Graphic Programming

Appendix System functions. The User’s Guide describes these functions briefly in
tabular form.
These descriptions are identical with the help texts of the softkey me-
nus.
Also, the workholder and tool types are described with the help of a
drawing and parameters.
Further notes
Key symbols The operator actions described here always assume that you are using
the keyboard on the operator panel.
The key symbols in the example correspond to the symbols on the
operator panel.
If you are using the full keyboard for operating the Graphic Program-
ming System, please refer to Section 3 which explains the differences
between the key symbols.
System texts System texts such as softkey texts, names of interactive screenforms
or parameter names in interactive screenforms are always written in
bold type.
Operator inputs Operator inputs such as parameter inputs in interactive screenforms
are presented in “inverted commas”.
Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
2 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 Interactive screenform control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

3.2 Selection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3 Other key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
4 Programming Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 File environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4.2 Empirical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.3 Graphic programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
4.4 Programming with face and peripheral surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
4.4.1 Create (define) surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–42
4.4.2 Editing a created surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–44
4.4.3 Select surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45
4.5 Programming for a vertical boring and turning mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47
4.6 Creating tools and workholders graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
4.6.1 Extend masterdata catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54
4.6.2 Generate (new) magazine with (new) tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56
4.6.3 Tool and workholder classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–59
4.7 Materials and cutting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–61
4.7.1 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–61
4.7.2 Cutting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–62
4.8 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–67
4.8.1 Oriented geometry with contour elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–68
4.8.2 Form elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–79
4.8.3 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–87
4.8.4 Copy contour or elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–88
4.9 Geometry end face/peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–90
4.9.1 Construction geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–91
4.9.2 Standard geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–107
4.9.3 Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–108
4.9.4 Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–110
4.10 Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–111
4.10.1 Magazine for tools and workholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–113
4.10.2 Beginning of program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–114
4.10.3 Workholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–115
4.10.4 Operating sequences for turning functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–116
4.10.5 Tool selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–117
4.10.6 Cutting direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–122
4.10.7 Machining definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–123
4.10.8 Stock removal strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–127
4.10.9 Stock removal segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–141
4.10.10 Grooving technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–148
4.10.11 Contour grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–152
4.10.12 Thread cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–155
4.10.13 Drilling functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–158
4.10.14 Collision check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–160
4.11 End face/peripheral surface machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–164
4.11.1 Milling technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–165
4.11.2 Contour milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–166
4.11.3 Surface milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–180
4.11.4 Manual milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–182
4.11.5 Solid milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–186
4.11.6 Drilling technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–192
4.12 Machine and auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–194
4.13 Insert blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–195
4.14 Machining simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–198
4.15 Create part program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–202
4.15.1 Edit part program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–203
4.16 Program steps (work schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–204
4.16.1 Combining program steps in a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–207
4.16.2 Edit program step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–208
4.16.3 Edit program step name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–209
4.16.4 Insert program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–210
4.16.5 Delete program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–212
4.16.6 Move program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–213
4.16.7 Program step info1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–214
4.16.8 Recalculate program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–215
4.16.9 Conceal program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–216
4.17 Vertical softkey functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–217
4.18 Pocket calculator function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–218
4.18.1 Basic arithmetic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–220
4.18.2 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–220
4.18.3 Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–221
4.18.4 Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–221
4.18.5 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–221
4.19 Exit WOP function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–224
5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 Tools Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4

5.2 Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.2.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.2.2 Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.2.3 Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
5.2.4 Vertical softkey bar Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–22
5.3 End-face/peripheral surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–29
5.3.1 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–29
5.3.2 Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42
5.3.3 Vertical softkey bar Drilling and Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–48
5.4 Tool types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–50
5.4.1 Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–50
5.4.2 Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–53
5.4.3 Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–57
5.4.4 Milling cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–62
5.5 Model for turning with C-axis option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–66
6 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
08.94
03.95
1 Introduction
Starting from the workpiece sketch, you use graphics for defining:
S the workholders
S the tools
S the blank contour
S the machined part contour
S machining
and the corresponding part program in DIN code is generated automati-
cally.
You can simulate the programmed traversing movements and display
these on the screen.
The part program can be edited at a later date.
You always program in different planes which you define as a surface.
The surfaces can be the geometry of a turned part or the face or
peripheral surface of the turned part.
The system calculates the geometry and machining information at the
machining level of the machine only when the Create part prog. func-
tion is activated.
Powered tools can machine the face or peripheral surface of the turned
part with drilling or milling operations. The machine must, however,
have a C axis and the Transmit function must be available.
J
 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 1–1

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
2 Help Function
The function described below provides you with help in almost every
operating situation.
By pressing the help key, you activate the help system which is stored
in the programming system.
Help in the Graphic

Programming System
sTools
i Material S Help texts concerning the current horizontal softkey functions are
available if the first softkey of the horizontal softkey menu shows a
green “ i ”.
S You can obtain graphic help for the various input fields in almost all
interactive screenforms. They are not marked specially.
Help texts for the
functions in the hori-
zontal softkey menu
If no interactive screen form is displayed, the help system describes
the functions of the horizontal softkeys after this key has been pressed.
Fig. 2.1 Help texts
The designations F1 to F7 (see Fig. 2.1) refer to the softkeys of the

horizontal menus, e.g.:
S F1 = Tools Material
S F2 = Geometry

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
2 Help Function 08.94
11.95
If a black triangle apears next to the help text of a softkey, you can
press this key to open a further explanatory help screen.
Close help screen

Press the RECALL key to close the help screen.
Graphic parameter The graphic description of the individual input fields (see Fig. 2.2) can
description be closed
by pressing the RECALL key.
The individual screens are displayed again by pressing the Help key.
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
+X
Î
F
+Z
ÎÎ L
Î Q
# 274
Fig. 2.2 Graphic help
The parameters in the graphic help screenforms are marked white.
2–2  Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
03.95 2 Help Function
Notes on the graphics The axis-specific names of the interactive screenform (e.g. dE_Y1) de-
for end faces and pe- pend on the coordinate system displayed.
ripheral surfaces 1)
The axis-specific names of the help graphics (e.g. dEX) correspond to
the horizontal and vertical axis designations of the selected surface
(see example, Fig. 2.3).
Fig. 2.3 Example: help graphics for creating a geometry
The table below illustrates the axis designations of the example pro-
vided in Fig. 2.3.
Interactive screenform Graphic help
E_Y1 EX
dE_Y1 dEX
E_X1 EZ
dE_X1 dEZ
1) Only possible with the C-axis option

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
3 Operation
This manual mainly describes the operator control concepts and the
operator control and display elements of the “Graphic Programming
System” (GPS) package.
To practise, we advise you to program a workpiece as given in an ex-
ample (see User’s Guide “Part 1: Programming Examples”).
The User’s Guide here describes the key functions during graphic pro-
gramming.
The following sections describe the keys for operating
S the interactive screenforms,
S the crosshair and
S the selection.
The Graphic Programming System gives you further

information for operating the system.
The operating information is described in the line
underneath the graphic field.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
3 Operation 08.94
09.96
3.1 Interactive screenform control
Parameters are required for programming the workpiece or the tools.

The graphic programming system displays interactive screenforms in
the graphic area.
They contain parameter input fields. You enter these values in interac-
tive mode.
The following figure shows an example.
Fig. 3.1 Interactive screenform control
Interactive screen- Every interactive screenform has a name which is displayed in the first
form name line. In this example, the name is Cylinder.
Parameters These parameters are identified with names. They have input or in-
formation fields with values.
In this example, the Length is one such parameter.
Input field An interactive screenform allows parameters to be input. Input fields
are emphasised by colors. The values are input through the alpha nu-
meric keyboard. In this example, these are the fields with the values
“0.000”.
Continuation form A continuation form allow several entries to be made for a parameter.
The existance of a continuation form is indicated by a black triangle
pointing upwards. The field is a selection field.
A continuation form can either be an interactive screenform or a text
selection form.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 3 Operation
Text selection field A text selection field can be recognized by a black triangle pointing to the
left.
In this selection field you can toggle the individual texts or make a selection in
a selection form.
A continuation form can either be an interactive screenform or a text
selection form.
Selection form A selection form is used for selecting certain specific inputs. The possi-
bilities are given by the system.
Our example shows the strategy for Follow.
Fig. 3.2 Selection form

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
3 Operation 08.94
09.96
Key functions for in-

teractive screenform
control Function in interactive
Operator panel Full keyboard
screenforms
With the Home key, you put the
cursor into the first input field and
accept the parameters that have
been input.
With the End key you go from in-
put field to input field and accept
the parameters that have been
input.
With these keys, you control the
cursor within a field when enter-
ing parameters.
With these keys, you move the
cursor from input field to input
field and accept the parameters
that have been input.
The CLEAR key deletes the

character to the left of the cursor.
With this key, you move for-

wards from input field to input
field and accept the parameters
that have been input.
If a black triangle can be seen
to the right of the input field, you
open a continuation form with this
key.
You use the alphanumeric keys
... ... ... ... ... ... to enter parameters.
The RECALL key ends interac-

tive screenform input and the
system ignores all inputs.
The RECALL key closes the help
screenforms.
With the INPUT key you end
screenform inputs and accept all
entries.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 3 Operation
Function in interactive
screenforms
With the Help key you call up a
screen with help text for each
horizontal softkey menu. This
contains explanatory texts relat-
ing to the various softkey func-
tions.
If an interactive screenform is
displayed on the screen, you ob-
tain graphical help for the param-
eters on pressing this key.
If there is an interactive screen-
Control form on the screen and the cur-
58
sor is located in a numeric input
field, you can call up a Pocket
N calculator function with this key.
51
With this key or key combination

Control you can combine the work
58
schedule steps to a block when
the function Program steps is
N active.
51
If the cursor is on a text selection

Control field, you can show the texts on
58
the screen in this field one after
the other with this key combina-
N tion or key. This field is charac-
51 terized by a black triangle.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
3 Operation 08.94
09.96
3.2 Selection control
When working with the graphic programming system, you will find that
in certain functions the operator guidance runs immediately over the
key described below.
You may wish to execute one of the following
S selection with the crosshair,
S direct selection with cursor keys, with operator guidance,
S direct selection with cursor keys, without operator guidance.
Information line The graphic programming system guides you while you program. An
(see Fig. 3.3) information line at the bottom of the graphic area tells you what to do.
The function Oriented geometry is an exception. This function uses
the Information line as a log line.
Selection with After you have pressed the softkey
crosshair
Init. point Init. point [ † ],

[ † ] on programming level, for example: Machining/Turning/Finish_cut
use the operating element crosshair to select e.g. the Initial point of
the turning operation of a contour.
The following Fig. 3.3 shows such an example.
Crosshair
Information line
Fig. 3.3 Selection control with crosshair
As the display shows, the operator guidance text in the Information

line asks you to perform a particular task. Here, the command “Init.
point: H – define for processing” refers to the crosshair.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 3 Operation
Key functions for

crosshair control
Function in interactive screen-

forms
You move the crosshair with
these keys.
By pressing the INPUT key, you

select the element contacted by
the crosshair and mark it opti-
cally.
By pressing the RECALL key,
you end the function and all ac-
tions are lost.
Selecting with cur- In the information line the graphic programming system distinguishes
sor keys and opera- between
tor guidance
S selecting the contour with or
S moving and selecting the initial point or
S end point on a contour with .

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
3 Operation 08.94
11.94
Selecting the The following Fig. 3.4 gives an example of selecting a contour “Recess”
contour in the Machining/Turning/Grooving function.
Selected
groove
coloured
Information line
Fig. 3.4 Selection control contour

Contours or elements that have been selected are marked with a
colour.
Selecting The following Fig. 3.5 shows an example of selecting an “Initial point”.
point The function Machining/Turning/Roughing gives you commands in
the information line.
Selected
groove
coloured
End point
Information line
Fig. 3.5 Selection control initial and end point

The following again applies
S operator guidance in the information line,
S initial point and end point marked with a colour.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 3 Operation
Key functions

Operator panel Full keyboard forms
You select the contour with these

keys.
You move the initial point with

this key.
You move the end point with this

key.
The INPUT key accepts the se-

lected element or selected point.
Pressing the INPUT key twice

activates the function you require
for the contour (e.g. Face rough-
ing).
Abort the function with the RE-

CALL key, all actions are lost.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
3 Operation 08.94
09.96
Selecting with cur- The function Oriented geometry (see Section 4.8.1) displays the indi-
sor keys without op- vidual elements programmed by you in the information line below the
erator guidance graphic area.
The following Fig. 3.6 shows such an example.
Information line
GE GE GE GE GW
Fig. 3.6 Selection control with cursor keys without operator guidance
The selected construction elements are marked with a colour.
Key functions
Full keyboard Function in interactive screen-

Operator panel
forms
You move the cursor within the
information line with these keys.
If a contour element can already
be displayed, this element is
marked in the graphic area.
You move the cursor to the start-
ing point with the Home key.
You move the cursor to the last

element with the END key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 3 Operation
3.3 Other key functions
3.3 Other key functions
The operator control elements described below apply in all operating

situations.

forms
With the MACHINE AREA key
you switch over from any menu
into the machine area. The oper-
ating status of the window now in
the background remains as it is.
You can display the five areas on
the horizontal softkey menu at
any time using the Area switch-
over key.
You extend the horizontal softkey
functions by pressing the ETC
key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 4 Programming Functions
4 Programming Functions
Section 4 contains
S information about the WOP file environment
S some descriptions of WOP function applications
– tools
– materials
– geometry
– machining
– surface
– program steps, and also
S a description of the pocket calculator function.
It is recommended that you work through “User’s

Guide Part 1: Programming Examples”.
This Guide documents each individual step
performed by the operator from geometry definition
to creation of the part program by way of a
workpiece drawing.
This “User’s Guide Part 2: Operator and
Programming Functions” assumes that you have
worked through the exercise and are familiar with
the functions used in it.
4.1 File environment
During programming the graphic programming system uses, alters and

generates:
S empirical value file (uses)
S part programs (generates)
S program steps as work schedule (generates)
S user magazines (uses, alters, generates)
S master data catalog (uses, alters)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4 Programming Functions 08.94
09.96
4.2 Empirical values

Purpose The empirical value file is an ASCII file made available to the user (program-
mer) in which settings and program sequences can be stored by setting vari-
ables. The file is executed when the system powers up, thus initiating all en-
tered variables. Any changes made to the empirical value file therefore do not
have an effect until the system is re-initialized.
Notes on In addition to the empirical value file there is also an configuring file.
programming
Configuring file The configuring file is an ASCII file available to the machine manufacturer in
which all the machine-dependent data are configured. The file is executed
when the system powers up, thus initiating all entered variables. Any changes
made to the configuring file therefore do not have an effect until the system is
re-initialized (e.g. with or without multiple surface machining).
Empirical value file You can edit the empirical value file.
The values for positions, lengths and distances are al-

ways entered in “metric”.
Anything not located between two vertical lines is interpreted as a comment

and is ignored. All instructions in “|” are executed.
For example: Blank orientation cylinder |V13612 = 2| right.
Operating
sequences
The relevant environment description describes how you

S call up and
S edit
an empirical values file.
You alter the value assignment behind the “=” sign.

For example: |V831 = 2|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Activating altered If a interactive screenform is displayed on the screen and the cursor is lo-
empirical values cated in an input field you can
Call the calculator function with the toggle key and change the empirical
value file or configuring file by entering variables, e.g.: |V1362 = ...|. In this
case, the set variables apply immediately and are not reset until the graphic
programming system is terminated.
If you have changed the empirical value file using the editor you can activate
the variables by
S performing a cold restart (power on reset) or
S activating the softkey functions Read new or Read, original.
The empirical values in a file are listed individually below.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Contents of the ERFAHRUNGSWERTE Maskenvorbelegungen1)

empirical value file DEFAULT VALUES /Default Settings in Screen forms
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Programmanfang:
Beginning of program:
Programmnummer, Vorbesetzung
Program number, default
|V1978=”1”|
Maschinenname:
Maschine name:
|V1981=” ”|
Einschaltstellung Ebene:
Flexible Plane Selection:
1:
2: G18 immer bei Drehen !
G18 fixed for Turning!
3:
4:
|V812=2|
Einschaltstellung Nullpunkt-Verschiebung
Zero Offset effective after control power on
1: G53
2: G54
3: G55
4: G56
5: G57
|V831=2|
Wegbedingung für Programmanfang

Type of move at the beginning of program
0: G00
1: G01
|V926=0|
********************************************************************************
1) The parameters have been taken from the empirical values file of the NC (status: Thursday, September 21st 1995)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Programmende:
End of program:
Ref.-Position anfahren
Travel to Machine Reference position?
2: nein / no
1: ja / yes
|V859=2|
WKZ –Wechselposition anf.

Travel to Tool change position?
2: nein / no
1: ja / yes
|V858=1|
WKZ ablegen
Change Tool
2: nein / no
1: ja / yes
|V489=2|
********************************************************************************
Ein–/Ausgabesystem Bedienoberfläche
Input/Output–System User–Interface
V1249: Oberfläche: Metrisches oder Inch–System:
1: metrisch Einheit Schnittgeschw. = m/min
2: Inch Einheit Schnittgeschw. = ft/min
V1249: User interface: Metric or Inch–System
1: metric Cutting–Velocity = m/min
2: Inch Cutting–Velocity = ft/min
|V1249=1|
V1412: NC–Ausgabe
1: Ausgabe in mm
25.4: Ausgabe in Inch
V1412: NC–Output
1: Output in mm (metric System)
25.4: Output in Inch
1 Inch = 25.4 mm
|V1412=1|
Standard–Format fuer NC–Saetze

1: 3 Nachkommastellen
Standard format for NC–blocks
1: 3 fractional digits
|V1403=1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Funktionen vor Bearbeitung

Functions before machining operation
V1105 Positioniergeschwindigkeit
Axis positioning speed
1: Eilgang
Rapid traverse
2: Vorschub
Programmed feedrate
|V1105 = 1|
V1107 Zeitpunkt der Funktionsausgabe

Time of execution of auxiliary functions (M,S,T,H)
1: keine Ausgabe
no output
2: vor Anfahren
before travel
3: am Startpunkt
at Start position
|V1107 = 2|
V1108 Vorbelegung NPV

Default Zero Offset
1: aus
None
2: 1. NPV
1st ZO – G54
3: 2. NPV
2nd ZO – G55
4: 3. NPV
3rd ZO – G56
5: 4. NPV
4th ZO – G57
|V1108 = 2|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Funktionen nach Bearbeitung

Functions after machining operation
V1110 Positioniergeschwindigkeit
Axis positioning speed
1: Eilgang
Rapid traverse
2: Vorschub
Programmed feedrate
|V1110 = 1|
V1112 Zeitpunkt der Funktionsausgabe

Time of execution of auxiliary functions (M,S,T,H)
1: keine Ausgabe
no output
2: nach Abfahren
after travel
|V1112 = 2|
V1113 Vorbelegung NPV

Default Zero Offset
1: aus
None
2: 1. NPV
st ZO – G54
3: 2. NPV
2nd ZO – G55
4: 3. NPV
3rd ZO – G56
5: 4. NPV
4th ZO – G57
|V1113 = 2|
********************************************************************************
Rohteil
Blank
Rohteilorientierung Zylinder
Orientation of the Cylindrical Blank
Select the location of the reference point of the cylindrical blank
1: Links
1: On the left edge of the cylindrical blank
2: Rechts
2: On the right edge of the cylindrical blank
3: Mitte
3: In the middle of the cylindrical blank
|V1362=1|
Verschiebung Rohteilnullpunkt gegen Werkstücknullpunkt ZP

The Z axis distance between the cylindrical blank reference point
(selected above) and workpiece zero
|V1363=0| mm
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Stechen
Grooving
Sicherheitsabstand aussen CLD
Safetey clearance outside CLD
|V1251 = 2.0| mm
Sicherheitsabstand innen CLD

Safetey clearance inside CLD
|V1252 = 1.0| mm
Rueckzugsweg beim Vorstechen – Schnittaufteilung

Retraction path with rough grooving – cutting strategy
|V1478=1.0| mm
Rueckzugsweg im Eilgang =0, Vorschub =1

Retraction path in rapid traverse = 0, feedrate = 1
|V1479=0|
Mindestüberlappung beim Vorstechen MO

Minimum overlap with rough grooving MO
MO = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1254
MO = Tool nose radius * V1254
|V1254 = 1.0|mm
Stehenzulassende Höhe bei Fasen/Verrund. auf dem Nutgrund

beim Vorstechen (Gewindefreistich)
Allowance left on the chamfer/rounding at the base of the groove
after rough grooving (thread undercut)
Wert = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1255
Value = Tool nose radius * V1255
|V1255 = 1.0|
Sicherheitsabstand von der Schulter beim Fertigstechen

Safety allowance from the shoulder during finish grooving
CLD1 = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1259
CLD1 = Tool nose radius * V1259
|V1259 = 2.5|
Abhebmass im Einstich beim Vorstechen DV

Lift dimension in groove during rough grooving DV
DV = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1260
DV = Tool nose radius * V1260
|V1260 = 2.5|
Schulterfasen < Fasenwert werden nicht vorgestochen

Shoulder chamfer < Chamfer value Rough grooving not possible
Fasenwert = Werkzeugbreite * V1261
Chamfer value = Tool width * V1261
|V1261 = 1.0|mm
Schulterverrundungen < Radius werden nicht vorgestochen

Shoulder rounding < Radius Rough grooving not possible
Radius = Werkzeugbreite * V1262
Radius = Tool width * V1261
|V1262 = 1.0|mm

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Stechen
Grooving continued
Fasen und Verrundungen am Boden werden gestuft vorgestochen
1: ja
0: nein
Chamfer and rounding at the base during rough grooving is done
in stages
1: yes
0: no
|V1263 = 1|
Es wird immer auf maximalen Durchmesser zurückgezogen

1: ja
0: ja
Tool is always retracted to maximum diameter
1: yes
0: no
|V1264 = 1|
Art der Verweilzeitausgabe :

0: in Sekunden
1: in Umdrehungen
Definition of Time delay
0: in Seconds
1: in Revolutions of spindle
|V1390 = 1|
Verweilzeit beim Freischneiden

Time delay during undercutting:
|V1265 = 1|
Vorschubfaktor beim Rückzug

Eilgang = 0, Vorschub > 0
Feedrate factor during tool retraction
Rapid traverse = 0, Feedrate > 0
|V1266 = 0|
Relativ zulässige Überlappungstoleranz unterschreiten:

Wert = (1.0 – V1267) * Überlappung;
Relative permissible overlap tolerence not reached:
Value = (1.0 – V1267) * Overlap;
|V1267 = 0.1|
Rohteilakualisierung Einstich
1: ja
0: nein
Update Blank groove
1: yes
0: no
|V1270 = 1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Gewindeschneiden
Thread cutting
Sicherheitsabstand aussen/plan CLD
Safety clearance outside/face CLD
|V1271 = 1.0| mm

Safety clearance inside CLD
|V1272 = 1.0| mm
Einlaufstrecke V1273Steigung AD
Thread Run-in V1273pitch AD
|V1273 = 1.1| mm
Auslaufstrecke V1274Steigung OD
Thread Run-out V1274pitch OD
|V1274 = 1.0| mm
Standardgangzahl Gewindeschneiden NOT

Number of turns in thread cutting NOT
|V1275 = 1.0|
Gewindeschnittfolge mehrgängige Gewinde

Zerspannungsart:
0: fertig pro Gang
1: alternierend
Thread cutting sequence multiple threads
0: Stock removal: complete per turn
1: alternating
|V1276 = 0|
Schnittaufteilung:
2: konst. Schnittiefe
3: konst. Spanvolumen
Cutting strategy:
2: constant cutting depth
3 constant stock removal volume
|V1277 = 2|
Degressionsberechnung bei konst. Spanvolumen durch

0: Siemens Formel
1: Alternativ Formel
Cutting depth calculation with constant chip volume
0: Siemens Formel
1: Alternative formula
|V1310 = 1|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Gewindeschneiden
Thread cutting continued
Rückhub
0: nein
1: ja
Lift
0: no
1: yes
|V1278 = 1|
Zustellen
0: Eilgang
1: Vorschub
Infeed
0: rapid
1: feed
|V1279 = 0|
Flankenwinkel
Cutting angle
|V1280 = 25|
Faktor zur Berechnung von Aussengewinden

Factor for calculating outside threads
|V1281 = 0.61343|
Faktor zur Berechnung von Innengewinden

Factor for calculating inside threads
|V1282 = 0.54127|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Vordrehen / Fertigdrehen
Rough turning / Finish Turning
Einebnen von Formelementen.
Wertigkeit:
+1 = Einstich
+2 = Gewindefreistich
+4 = Filzeinstich
+8 = Freistich
V1407 = Summe der Wertigkeiten (Bit-Leiste)
Type of form elements.
Values:
+1 = Recess
+2 = Thread undercut
+4 = Felt-ring recess
+8 = Undercut
V1407 = Sum of the values (Bit-pattern)
|V1407 = 5|
Hinterschneiden : 0 =nein, 1 =ja

Vordrehen am Durchmesser
Vordrehen an Stirnflaeche
Konturparalleldrehen am Durchmesser
Konturparalleldrehen an Stirnflaeche
Fertigdrehen am Durchmesser
Fertigdrehen an Stirnflaeche
Kontur–Vorstechen am Durchmesser
Kontur–Vorstechen an Planflaeche
Kontur–Fertigstechen am Durchmesser
Kontur–Fertigstechen an Planflaeche
V1476 =1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
|V1476=1111010100|
Freiwinkel beim Hinterschneiden :

|V1477=1.0|
Relief cutting: 0 = no, 1 = yes

Rough turning on diameter
Rough turning on end face
Turning parallel to contour on diameter
Turning parallel to contour on end face
Finish turning on diameter
Finish turning on end face
Contour rough grooving on diameter
Contour rough grooving on end face
Contour finish grooving on diameter
Contour finish grooving on end face
V1476 =1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
|V1476=1111010100|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Vordrehen/Fertigdrehen
Rough turning/Finish turning continued
Anfahren an Kontur / Approaching the contour
Vordrehen:
1 – In Bearbeitungsrichtung (SM1)
2 – Senkrecht zur Bearb.richtung (SM2)
3 – Senkrecht zur Kontur (SM3)
Rough turning:
1 – In machining direction (SM1)
2 – Vertical to machining direction (SM2)
3 – Vertical to the contour (SM3)
Konturparalleldrehen:
Contour parellel turning:
3 – Senkrecht zur Kontur (Eingabe nicht wirksam)
Vertical to the contour (input not effective) (SM3)
Fertigdrehen:
Finish turning:
1 – In Bearbeitungsrichtung
In the machining direction (SM1)
2 – Ueber Bogen
over arc (SM2)
Kontur–Vorstechen:
Contour rough grooving:
1 – In Zustellrichtung (SM1)
In infeed direction (SM1)
2 – Senkrecht zur Kontur
Vertical to the contour (SM3)
Kontur–Fertigstechen:
Contour finish grooving:
1 – Aus Bearbeitungsrichtung
In the machining direction (SM1)
2 – Ueber Bogen
over arc (SM2)
Vordrehen am Durchmesser/Rough turning at diameter

Vordrehen an Stirnflaeche/Rough turning at end face
Konturparalleldrehen am Durchmesser/Contour parallel turning at diameter
Konturparalleldrehen an Stirnflaeche/Contour parallel turning at end face
Fertigdrehen am Durchmesser/Finish turning at diameter
Fertigdrehen an Stirnflaeche/Finish turning at end face
Kontur–Vorstechen am Durchmesser/Contour rough grooving at diameter
Kontur–Vorstechen an Planflaeche/Contour rough grooving at face
Kontur–Fertigstechen am Durchmesser/Contour finish grooving at diameter
Kontur–Fertigstechen an Planflaeche/Contour finish grooving at face
V1384 =2 2 1 1 2 2 0 0 1 1
|V1384=1111220011|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Fortsetzung Vordrehen / Fertigdrehen

Vordrehen: Abfahren von Kontur (letzte Schnitt)
Learning the contour (last step)
0 – Abheben Eilgang nicht Herausfahren (SM1)
1 – Abheben Vorschub nicht Herausfahren (SM2)
2 – Abheben Eilgang und Herausfahren (SM3)
3 – Abheben Vorschub und Herausfahren (SM4)
4 – Herausfahren ohne Abheben (SM5)
Rough turning: Leaving the contour (last Step)
0 – Lift in Rapid without retraction (SM1)
1 – Lift at feedrate without retraction (SM2)
2 – Lift in rapid traverse and retraction (SM3)
3 – Lift at feedrate and travel back (SM4)
4 – Travel back without lift (SM5)

V1287 =2 1 2 4 1 2 2 3 2 2
|V1287=333333333|
Versatzrichtung: in Schnittrichtung =0, tangential =1

Offset direction: in cutting direction =0, tangential =1

V1302 =1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
|V1302=1111111111|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94

Sicherheitsabstand aussen CLD
Safety clearance – outside CLD
|V1283 = 2.0| mm

Safety clearance – inside
|V1284 = 1.0| mm
Durchmesseraufmass OX
Diameter allowance OX
|V1285 = 0.5| mm
Planflächenaufmass OZ
Face allowance OZ
|V1286 = 0.25| mm
Vordrehen: Winkel für die Aufmassberechnung am Kegel

Kegelwinkel:
<= wert Aufmass = Durchmesser,
> wert Aufmass = Planfläche
Rough turning: Angle for calculating allowance on cone
Cone angle:
<= value Allowance = Diameter,
> value Allowance = facing surface
|V1288 = 45.0|
Schruppspantiefe CT
CT = V1289 * max. Spantiefe des Werkzeugs
Roughing cut depth CT
CT = V1289 * max. stock removal depth
|V1289 = 0.75|
Fertigdrehen: Faktor für Radiusberechnung beim Anfahren über

Kreis
Kreisradius = V1290 * RS (Schneidenradius am Werkzeug)
Bei RS = 0 wird Ersatzwert für RS genommen (V1291)
Finish turning: Factor for determining the radius before tracing
a circle
Radius of circle = V1290 * RS (Tool nose radius)
if RS = 0 the default value in (V1291) will be used for
calculations
|V1290 = 1.5|
Fertigdrehen: Ersatzwert für RS am Werkzeug

Finish turning: Default value of RS for the tool
|V1291 = 0.5|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96

Vordrehen: Abhebwinkel DA
Rough turning: Lifting angle DA
|V1293=45.0|
Faktor zur Berechnung von Versatzwert:

Factor for calculation of offset value:
Versatzwert = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1480
Offset value = tool nose radius * V1480
|V1480=1|
Vordrehen: Winkel fuer Umschalten von Plan–Vorschub

auf Durchmesservorschub
Rough turning: Angle for switching over from Face feed
to Diameter feed
|V1296=45.0|
Laenge der Abschlussgeraden zwischen Anfangs– bzw. Endpunktes

an Fertigteilkontur und Rohteil beim Erzeugen
des Zerspanungssegments
Length of single drawing segment between Start- and Endpoint
|V1297=1000.0| mm
Entscheidungswert fuer bedingtes Nachziehen

Nachziehen: Bedingt ueber Param. (2)
Param =V1300: Winkel zwischen Hauptschneide
und Nachzieh–Objekt
bei Werten > V1300 wird nachgezogen
< V1300 nicht
Rounding value for conditional rounding
Rounding : Conditional over parameter. (2)
Param =V1300: Angle between main cutting edge
and rounding–Object
for values> V1300 will be rounded
< V1300 will not
|V1300=5.0|
Abhebmass nach dem Schnitt DV

DV =Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1301
Lifting dimension after the cut DV
DV =Tool nose radius * V1301
|V1301=2.0|
Umsetztabelle Oberflächengüte auf Rauhtiefe

Conversion table surface finish to surface roughness
Schruppen, roughing |V1482=100.0|
Schlichten, finishing |V1483=25..0|
Feinschlichten, fine finishing |V1442=6.3|
Feinstschlichten, very fine finishing |V1485=1.0|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Abstechen
Cutoff
Verweilzeit beim Freischneiden (Ausgabe abhängig von V1390)
Delay time during undercut (Interpretation depending on V1390)
|V1303 = 0|
Abhebmaß beim Abstich DV

DV = Werkzeugschneidenradius * V1304
Lifting dimension for cutoff DV
DV = Tool nose radius * V1304
|V1304 = 2.0|
Rückzugfaktor für Vorschub RFF

Faktor für Vorschubreduzierung beim Rückzug
0 = Eilgang
Retraction factor for feed RFF
Factor for feed reduction during retraction
0 = Rapid
|V1305 = 0|
Ersatzwert für RS bei Abstich wenn RS = 0

Substitute value for RS for cutoff when RS = 0
|V1306 = 1.0|
Durchmesser ab dem die Vorschubreduzierung wirken soll DR

Diameter from which feed reduction should be effective DR
|V1307 = 0|
Durchmesserstufen für Vorschubreduzierung DI

Diameter stages for feed reduction DI
|V1308 = 0|
Wert der Vorschubreduzierung

Value for feedrate reduction
|V1309 = 0|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Bohren allgemein
Drilling
V1117 Rückzugsabstand inkremental zur Bearbeitung CR
V1117 Incremental retraction distance from the machined surface CR
|V1117 = 8| mm
V1118 Sicherheitsabstand inkremental zur Bearbeitung CT

V1118 Incremental safety clearance from machined surface CT
|V1118 = 5| mm
********************************************************************************
Ausgabesteuerung Bohrbearbeitung
Output control drilling
V1179 Ausgabesteuerung
1: aufgelöste Einzelsätze
2. Steuerungzyklus
V1179 Output control
1: Single blocks
2. Control cycle
|V1179=2|
V1180 Ausgabesteuerung Zyklus

1: als G–Funktion
2: als Unterprogramm
V1180 Output control cycle
1: as G-function
2: as subroutine
|V1180=1
********************************************************************************
Bohren zentrisch
Drilling concentric
V1372 Sicherheitsabstand zur Kontur bei automatischer
Tiefenberechnung
V1372 Safety clearance from contour with automatic
depth determination
|V1372 = 0.05| mm
********************************************************************************
Bohren/Zentrieren
Drilling/Center
V1181 A–Maß–Verrechnung
0: nein
1: ja
V1181 A–Dimension calculation
0: no
1: yes
|V1181=1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Bohren/Plansenken
Drilling/spotface
0: nein
1: ja
V1182 A–Dimension calculation
0: no
1: yes
|V1182=1|
V1183 Verweilzeit in sec T2

V1183 Delay in sec T2
|V1183 = 2|
********************************************************************************
Tieflochbohren
Deep hole drilling
V1184 Erste Bohrtiefe D1
V1184 First drilling depth D1
|V1184=5| mm
V1185 Verweilzeit am Anfangspunkt in sec T1

V1185 Dwell at the starting point in sec T1
|V1185 = 2|
V1186 Verweilzeit Tiefe in sec T2

V1186 Dwell at depth in sec T2
|V1186 = 3|
V1187 Degression DR
V1187 Degression DR
|V1187=2|
V1188 Bohrstrategie
1: Spänebrechen
2: Entspanen
V1188 Drilling Strategy
1: Chip breaking
2: Stock removal
|V1188 =1|
0: nein
1: ja
V1206 A-Dimension calculation
0: no
1: yes
|V1206=1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Gewindebohren
Tapping
V1189 Zuschlag Sicherheitsebene
V1189 Allowance Safety plane
|V1189=4| mm
V1190 Verweilzeit Tiefe in sec T2

V1190 Dwell time at depth in sec T2
|V1190 = 1|
V1191 Drehrichtung Rückzug
1: automatisch
2: rechts
3: links
V1191 Direction of rotation in retraction
1: automatic
2: right
3: left
|V1191 =1|
V1192 Drehrichtung nach Zyklus

1: automatisch
2: rechts
3: links
V1192 Direction of rotation after cycle
1: automatic
2: right
3: left
|V1192 = 1|
V1193 Gewindebohren zentrisch

1: ohne Geber
2: mit Geber
3: ohne Ausgleichsfutter
V1193 Tapping concentric
1: without encoder
2: with encoder
3: without compensating chuck
|V1193 =2|
V1194 A-Maß-Verrechnung
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1194=1|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Gewindebohren
Tapping continued
V1422 Gewindebohren angetrieben
1: ohne Geber
2: mit Geber
V1422 Tapping M
1: without encoder
2: with encoder
|V1422 =1|
********************************************************************************
Ausbohren 1
Bore 1
V1195 Dwell time in sec T1
|V1195 = 2|
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1196=1|
Ausbohren 2
Bore 2
|V1197 = 2|
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1198=1|
Ausbohren 3
Bore 3
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1199=1|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Ausbohren 4
Bore 4
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1200=1|
V1203 Verweilzeit Tiefe T1

|V1203 = 4|
Ausbohren 5
Bore 5
0: nein
1: ja
0: no
1: yes
|V1204=1|
V1205 Verweilzeit Tiefe T1

|V1205 = 4|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Werkzeugwechsel:
Tool change:
Ablauf:
Kühlmittel aus
NPV aus
Sequence:
Coolant off
Deselect tool offset
Werkzeugwechselpunkt Drehen
Tool change position – turning
V1220 X–Wert
V1220 X-Value
|V1220=250| mm
V1221 Z–Wert
V1221 Z-Value
|V1221=150| mm
Freier DIN–Code Text/DIN–Code bei WZW V1951

Free DIN-Code Text/DIN-Code used for tool change V1951
|V1951=””|
Werkzeugverschleißkorrektur in %
Werkzeugschneidenradius +=
(Werkzeugschneidenradius * V12**) / 100
Tool wear in %
Tool nose radius += (Tool nose radius * V12**) / 100
Schruppen:
Roughing:
|V1257 = 1.0|
Schlichten:
Finishing:
|V1258 = 1.0|
Stechen:
Grooving:
|V1298 = 1.0|
Gewindeschneiden:
Tapping:
|V1385 = 1.0|
Konturparallelschruppen:
Roughing parallel to the contour:
|V1408 = 1.0|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Steuerfunktionen
Switch functions
Drehen: Kinematikmaske beim Editieren anzeigen:
0: nein 1: ja
Turning: Display Kinematic screens while editing:
0: no 1: yes
|V1367 = 0|
Simulationsstartmodus
1: satzweise
0: kontinuierlich
Simulation startup mode
1: block by block
0: continuous
|V1371 =0|
Grundanfahrstrategie Stirn– und Mantelflächenbearbeitungen

V1115 Bewegung an Startpunkt
1: Ebene/Zustellung
2: Zustellung/Ebene
3: 3–achsig
4: Ebene
Basic approach strategy for face and peripheral surface machining
V1115 Movement from the start point
1: Plane/Location
2: Location/Plane
3: 3-axes
4: Plane
|V1115 = 1|
V1116 Interpretation des angegebenen Abstandes

1: Rückzugsabstand CR
2: Sicherheitsabstand CT
3: Anfahrabstand DS
4: Sicherheitsebene SP
V1116 Interpretation of the defined distance
1: Retracting distance CR
2: Safety clearance CT
3: Starting distance DS
4: Safety plane SP
|V1116 = 3|
V1119 Anfahrabstand DS
V1119 Starting distance DS
|V1119 =10|mm
V1120 Zuschlag auf Rohteiloberfläche für Sicherheitsebene SP

V1120 Addition to the outer blank surface for safety plane SP
|V1120 = 8 |mm
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Bahnbearbeitung / Path machining

Anfahren an Kontur
V1125 Anfahrstrategie
1: direkt SM1
2: konturnormal SM2
3: konturtangential SM3
4: tangential über Viertelkreis SM4
5: tangential aus Kreismittelpkt. SM5
6: tangential über Halbkreis SM6
Approaching the contour
V1125 Travelling strategy
1: direct SM1
2: vertical to machining direc. SM2
3: tangential to contour SM3
4: tangential to a quarter circle SM4
5: tangential from the circle center SM5
6: tangential over half circle SM6
|V1125 = 1|
V1126 Faktor auf Werkzeugradius für Anfahrabstand

AR=V1126*V401
V1126 Factor from tool nose radius for the starting clearance
AR=V1126*V401
|V1126 = 1.2|
V1127 Faktor auf Werkzeugradius für Anfahrradius

AD=V1127*V401
V1127 Factor from tool nose radius for starting radius
AD=V1127*V401
|V1127 = 1.2|
V1128 Absenkzeitpunkt
1: vor Anfahren LB
2: nach Anfahren LA
V1128 Tool lowerig time
1: before start LB
2: after start LA
|V1128 = 1|
V1129 Absenkgeschwindigkeit
1: Eilgang
2: Vorschub
V1129 Tool Lowering speed
1: Rapid traverse
2: Feed
|V1129 = 2|
V1130 Zeitpunkt Fräserradiuskorrektur einschalten

1: während Anfahrposition
3: während Anfahren
V1130 Time instance for considering the milling radial offset
1: when at start position
3: during approach
|V1130 = 1|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Fortsetzung Bahnbearbeitung / Path machining continued

Abfahren von Kontur
V1131 Abfahrstrategie
1: keine Bewegung EM1
2: über Konturnormale EM2
3: über Konturtangente EM3
4: tangential über Viertelkreis EM4
5: tangential auf Kreismittelpunkt EM5
Retraction from the contour
V1131 Retraction strategy
1: no movement EM1
2: vertical to contour EM2
3: tangential to contour EM3
4: tangential to quarter circle EM4
5: tangential from the center of circle EM5
|V1131 = 4|
V1132 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Abfahrabstand

DD=V1132*V401
V1132 Factor from Tool diameter for retraction clearance
DD=V1132*V401
|V1132 = 1.5|
V1133 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Abfahrradius

DR=V1133*V401
V1133 Factor from Tool diameter for retraction radius
DR=V1133*V401
|V1133 = 1.3|
V1134 Abhebezeitpunkt
1: vor Abfahren RB
2: nach Abfahren RA
V1134 Lifting time instance
1: before retraction RB
2: after retraction RA
|V1134 = 1|
V1135 Abhebegeschwindigkeit
1: Eilgang
2: Vorschub
V1135 Lifting feed
1: Rapid traverse
2: Feed
|V1135 = 1|
V1136 Zeitpunkt Abschalten Fräserradiuskorrektur

1: während Abfahren
3: nach Abfahrposition
V1136 Time instance for switching off the milling radial offset
1: during retraction
3: after retraction
|V1136 = 3|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Strategie Konturbearbeitung
The contour machining strategy
V1160 Bearbeitungsrichtung DP
1: in Konturdefinitionsrichtung
2: gegen Konturdefinitionsrichtung
V1160 Machining direction DP
1: in direction of contour definition
2: against direction of contour definition
|V1160 = 1|
V1161 Zustellaufteilung IF
1: maximal (angegebene Zustellung)
2: gleichmäßig
(Berechnete Zustellung <= angegebene Zustellung)
V1161 Depth of cut IF
1: maximum (as defined in tool data)
2: equal (calculated depth <= defined depth)
|V1161 =1|
V1162 Bearbeitung SP
1: umlaufend
2: pendelnd
V1162 Machining SP
1: rotary
2: oscillating
|V1162 = 2|
V1163 Steuerung der Bahnkorrektur durch das

Programmiersystem bei Engstellen,
Flaschenhalsproblemen und wegfallenden Radien OV
1: nein
2: ja
V1163 Path correction due to problems with short corners,
and absent radius OV
1: no
2: yes
|V1163 = 1|
V1164 Bearbeitungsseite Konturbearbeitung TP

1: mitte on
2: links le
3: rechts re
4: innen in
5: außen ou
V1164 Machining of contours TP
1: middle on
2: left le
3: right re
4: inner in
5: outer ou
|V1164 = 1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Volumenfräsen
Solid milling
Absenken bei Zerspanen
Lowering during machining
V1140 Absenkstrategie
1: direkt LM1
2: über Schräge LM2
3: über Spirale LM3
V1140 Lowering strategy
1: direct LM1
2: as per slope LM2
3: spiral LM3
|V1140 = 1|
V1141 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Schrägenlänge

BL=V1140*V401
V1141 Factor from Tool diameter for length of slope
BL=V1140*V401
|V1141 = 2|
V1142 Schrägenwinkel in Grad BA

V1142 Slope angle in Degrees BA
|V1142 = 30|
V1143 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Spiralradius

HR=V1143*V401
V1143 Factor from Tool diameter for spiral radius
HR=V1143*V401
|V1143 = 0.75|
V1144 Spiralsteigung in mm/U HP

V1144 Spiral pitch in mm/rev HP
|V1144 = 1|
V1145 Drehrichtung der Spirale HD

1: rechts
2: links
V1145 Direction of rotation of the spiral HD
1: right
2: left
|V1145 = 1|
V1146 Absenkgeschwindigkeit
1: Eilgang
2: Vorschub
V1146 Lowering speed
1: Rapid traverse
2: Feed
|V1146 = 2|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Volumenfräsen
Solid milling continued
Abheben bei Zerspanen
Lifting during machining
V1147 Abhebestrategie
1: direkt RM1
2: über Schräge RM2
V1147 Lifting strategy
1: direct RM1
2: over slope RM2
|V1147 = 1|

BL=V1148*V401
V1148 Factor from tool diameter for length of slope
BL=V1148*V401
|V1148 = 2|

V1149 Angle of slope in degrees BA
|V1149 = 30|
1: Eilgang
2: Vorschub
V1150 Lifting speed
1: Rapid traverse
2: Feed
|V1150 = 2|
Strategie Zerspanen
Strategies for metal cutting
V1167 Überdeckungsgrad der Fräsbahnen in % DC
V1167 Overlapping angle of the milling cut in % DC
|V1167 = 30|
V1168 Anzahl der Bahnen (0 => vollständig ausräumen) NP

V1168 No. of cuts (0 => removal complete) NP
|V1168 = 0|
V1169 Gesenkschräge in Grad SK

V1169 Lowering angle in Degrees SK
|V1169 = 0|
V1170 maximaler Positionierweg im Vorschub in mm FD

V1170 maximum axial feed in mm FD
|V1170 = 50|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Fortsetzung Volumenfräsen
Solid milling continued
V1171 Aufteilung der Zustellung IF
1: maximal
2: gleichmäßig
V1171 Depth of cuts IF
1: maximum
2: uniform
|V1171 = 1|
V1172 Bearbeitungsrichtung (Umlaufsinn) CD

1: Uhrzeigersinn
2: Gegenuhrzeigersinn
V1172 Direction of machining (direction of motion) CD
1: Clockwise
2: Counterclockwise
|V1172 = 1|
V1173 Zerspanungsrichtung SD
1: außen –> innen
2: innen –> außen
V1173 Machining direction SD
1: outer –> inner
2: inner –> outer
|V1173 = 1|
V1174 Behandlung der Konturstartebenen bei Zerspanung

(Inselhöhe) IL
1: ignorieren
2: beachten
V1174 Evaluation of plane orientation during machining (Island
height) IL
1: ignore
2: consider
|V1174 = 1|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Überfräsen
Surface milling
V1152 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Anfahrabstand
AD=V1152*V401
V1152 Factor from tool diameter for approach clearance
AD=V1152*V401
|V1152 = 1.2|
V1153 Faktor auf Werkzeugdurchmesser für Anfahrradius

AR=V1153*V401
V1153 Factor from tool diameter for approach radius
AR=V1153*V401
|V1153 = 1.2|
Abheben von Flächenbearbeitung (Überfräsen)

Lifting tool off the contour (Milling)
V1154 Abhebestrategie
1: direkt RM1
2: über Schräge RM2
V1154 Lifting strategy
1: direct RM1
2: over slope RM2
|V1154 = 1|

BL=V1155*V401
V1155 Factor from tool diameter for length of slope
BL=V1155*V401
|V1155 = 2|

V1156 Angle of slope in degrees BA
|V1156 = 30|
1: Eilgang
2: Vorschub
V1157 Lifting speed
1: Rapid traverse
2: Feed
|V1157 = 2|

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Fortsetzung Überfräsen
Surface milling continued
Strategie Flächenfräsen (Uberfräsen)
Strategy for surface milling
V1176 Überdeckungsgrad der Fräsbahnen in % DC
V1176 Overlapping angle for milling in % DC
|V1176 = 30|
V1177 Umlaufsinn CD
1: Uhrzeigersinn
2: Gegenuhrzeigersinn
V1177 Direction of rotation CD
1: Clockwise
2: Counterclockwise
|V1177 = 2|
********************************************************************************
freier Freistich
free Undercut
V1410 Länge Freistich
V1410 Length Undercut
|V1410 = 2|mm
V1411 Tiefe Freistich

V1411 Depth Undercut
|V1411 = 1|mm
********************************************************************************
Magazinausgabe bei Werkzeugauswahl

wie Stammdaten (zweistufig, erst Klasse,
0: dann einzelne Werkzeuge)
1: direkt (einstufig)
Chuck definition
As per Siemens data (two step, first class,
0: individual tools)
1: direct (one step)
|V1383=1|
Additionskonstante für Zeichenmakro bei Referenz– und WZW–Punkt

Addition constant for character macro with reference and tool change point
|V928=100|mm
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Freischaltung Kollisionsüberwachung
0: ohne Überwachung
1: mit gesamten Werkzeug
2: mit Werkzeugschneide
Enable collision-check
0: deactivated
1: whole tool
2: insert only
Systemverhalten nach Auftreten einer Kollision
0: bei jeder Kollision wird eine Eingabe vom Benutzer
erwartet (ok oder esc)
1: bei ersten Kollision wird eine Eingabe vom Benutzer
erwartet (ok oder esc), alle nachfolgende nur kurz
angezeigt
2: Kollision wird angezeigt
Freischaltung der Kollisionsüberwachung
Systemverhalten nach Auftreten der Kollision
V1432= 1 0
System behaviour after occurrence of a collision

0: On a collision, input from the user is expected
(OK or ESC)
1: On the first collision, input from the user is expected
(OK or ESC), all following collisions are only displayed
briefly
2: Collision is displayed
Enable of collision monitoring
System behaviour after occurrence of a collision
V1432= 1 0
|V1432=21|
********************************************************************************
Größe des Schutzbereiches um Rohteil und Spannmittel

Offset to blank and Clamps for collision-checks
|V1433=0.5| mm
********************************************************************************
Fahren auf minimalen Bohrungsdurchmesser (BD) nach Innenbearbei-

tung
0: nein
1: ja
Approching minimum Drill diameter (BD) after inside processing
0: no
1: yes
|V1434=0|
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Werkzeugeingabe Drehwerkzeuge
Tool definition Turning
Halter
Haltertyp
1: Längs/oben
2: Quer/links
3: Quer/rechts
4: Längs/unten
Holder
Type of Holder
1: Longitudinal/top
2: Cross/left
3: Cross/right
4: Longitudinal/bottom
|V1323=3|
Minimale Schnittiefe für Drehwerkzeuge CMI

Minimum cutting depth for Turning tool CMI
|V1324=0.01| mm
Maximale Schnittiefe für Drehwerkzeuge CMA

Maximum cutting depth for Turning tool CMA
|V1325=5| mm
Haltermaß längs/quer FV1

Holder dimension length/cross FV1
|V1314=35| mm
Haltermaß Tiefe FV1

Holder dimension Depth FV1
|V1315=33| mm
Länge Halter L1
Holder length L1
|V1311=100| mm
Breite Halter L2
Holder width L2
|V1312=50| mm
Tiefe Halter
Holder depth
|V1313=66| mm
Schaft Shank
Schaftmaß Breite SM
Shank dimension width from tool reference point SM
|V1319=–50| mm
Schaftmaß Tiefe
Shank dimension depth
|V1320=5| mm

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fortsetzung Werkzeugeingabe Drehwerkzeuge

Tool definition Turning continued
Breite Schaft BS
Shank width BS
|V1317=25| mm
Tiefe Schaft
Shank depth
|V1318=10| mm
Schneidplatte Tool Tip

Dicke Schneidplatte
Thickness of tool tip
|V1321=2.38|
Einsatzlage, Insertion point

|V1322=0|
********************************************************************************
Werkzeugeingabe Bohrer/Fräser
Drilling/Milling Tool
Halter, Holder
Länge Halter, Holder Length LS1
|V1326=67| mm
Durchmesser Halter, Holder Diameter DS1

|V1327=50| mm
Schaft, Shaft
Durchmesser Schaft, Shaft Diameter DS5
|V1328=30| mm
********************************************************************************
Spannmittel
Workholder
Futterkörper, Chuck body
Länge Futterkörper, Length of Chuck L10
|V1331=76| mm
Innendurchmesser Futterkörper D11

Inner diameter of the Chuck D11
|V1332=52| mm
Außendurchmesser Futterkörper D10

Outer diameter of the chuck D10
|V1333=200| mm
Maximale Drehzahl, Maximum Speed U

|V1336=3000|
Spannbacke
Chuck Jaw
Längsmaß, Longitudinal dimension L
|V1334=76| mm
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Allgemeine Vorbelegung Geometrieeingabe:GP

General default geometry input:
Maskentyp fue die Eingabe Gerichteter Geometrie
1: einfacher Parametersatz, Simple parameter set
2: voller Parametersatz, Full parameter set
|V1488=1|
Automatisches Aufblenden der Hilfebilder

Automatic display of the help displays
1: ja / yes
2: nein (i-Taste oder F8) / no (i key or F8)
|V1489=1|
Geometrie–Eingabe ueber Steuerbild

Geometry input via control display
1: nein, no
2: ja, yes
|V1496=0|
Eingabe der Geometrie bei Vertikaldrehmaschinen

Input of the geometry on vertical drilling machines
(z.B. Karusselldrehmaschine)
(e.g. vertical boring and turning mill)
1: horizontal
2: vertikal, vertical
|V1500=1|
********************************************************************************
ENDE Erfahrungswerte–Datei
END of empirical values file
********************************************************************************

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.3 Graphic programming
Program. The following Fig. 4.1 shows a turned part in DIN isometry. The WOP
WOP user interface has been designed for C axis programming.
Active surface
Fig. 4.1 Basic setting WOP 1) (example)
Purpose The following types of machining (technologies) are possible with WOP:
S Turning and
S Drilling and milling 1) with powered tools.
X Milling peripheral Turning
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
surface X
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Drilling end face
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 4.2 Example of a machining operation

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Note: Representation When Program.WOP is called the fist time, the turning level is always
in the graphics area active. WOP inserts the name of the active surface (plane)1) in the up-
per right-hand corner of the graphics area (see Fig. 4.1).
The active surface is displayed on the right above

the graphics area as soon as you have defined a
geometry.
If you Read or calculate a workpiece which is already existing once

again (e.g. by selecting the Machining function), the Graphic Program-
ming System represents all surfaces defined in the graphics area1).
If you follow the instructions given below, the Graphic Programming
System once again displays the active surface.
Repre- The Representation and

sentation All planes on/off functions activate
the current surface in the graphics
All planes area.
on/off
Notes: Coordinate The coordinate zero “ ” in the graphics area is the design zero for
zero in the graphics the workpiece and the tool. This zero point is not yet a defined position
area in the working range of the NC machine.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.4 Programming with face and peripheral surfaces
If you wish to program the face and peripheral

surfaces with WOP, the following conditions must be
fulfilled:
S On the NC side, a C axis as well as cylinder
interpolation and Transmit must be available and
S On the WOP user interface side, the C axis option
must have been enabled by the machine
manufacturer in the configuring file.
Y1
X X1
Y
C
Z
Fig. 4.3 Axis designations
Note on Fig. 4.3 In the Graphic Programming System, the axis designations Y1 and X1
are the ordinates and the abscissae of the end face.
Notes on You program the tool geometry, workpiece geometry and the machining
programming technology graphically.
The function program. WOP allows:
S the definition of workholders, tools, tool magazines and material
lists,
S creation of tool geometry,
S programming of the machining technology,
S definition of a face or peripheral surface,
S graphic simulation of programmed traversing movements and
S generation of a part program.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
You will find the Graphic Programming System functions (see Fig. 4.1)
under the softkeys
S Tools Materials
S Geometry
S Machining
S Select surface
S Machining simulation
S Create part program

With the function Select surface1) you select the surface that you wish
to program from a selection menu.
You compile this selection menu under Create (define) surface 1) (see
Fig. 4.4).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Additional notes You program geometry and technology independently of each other. A
geometry must exist before the technology can be defined (call function
Machining).
You define the geometry contours and the machining of the individual
surfaces for
S turned part,
S peripheral and
S end face
separately.
When you start a workpiece programming operation the Graphic Pro-
gramming System always assumes that you first want to create a
turned part contour.
The sequence of operations (see Fig. 4.4) is preset in the menu path
Geometry.
É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
Geometry
Turning plane
Create Create1)
new surface
X From Free
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
turned part definition
Z
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ Turning plane
C/X
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Peripheral/
Finished end face
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Blank Z/Y
part
Peripheral
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Create /end face
new
Blank Finished
part
Groove
ÇÇ Holes
Fig. 4.4 Operating sequences for creating a geometry at the beginning

With the function Create surface you can define face sides and lateral
surfaces either
S from the finished turned part geometry or
S as a free geometry.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.4.1 Create (define) surface

Create
surface
Purpose You define end face and peripheral surfaces with the function Create
surface.
End face and peripheral surfaces can either be
S selected from finished turned part elements or
S freely defined in a screenform.
You program the geometry and machining for the individual surfaces
you have created.
Notes on
programming
Free If you wish to define your surfaces freely in a screenform, enter the Z
definition position, the diameter and a width value with a sign and/or absolute
depth in the free surface definition.
If you define an end face you are asked to enter the

orientation (direction of machining) left/right.
The default value is right (see Fig. 4.5).
X
X
Selected end
X1 Orientation
face element
right
Fig. 4.5 End face outside contour
With this information the Graphic Programming System creates a blank

which in the case of
S end faces
– is a circular disk with an entered depth and
S peripheral surfaces
– is a rectangle according to the generation with an entered width
– and radius as the depth.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
From turned If you wish to create an end face or peripheral surface from the finished
part turned part geometry, select a contour (e.g.: inside or outside).
This step can be ignored if only one contour exists.
Once you have selected a contour select one of the elements of the
contour.
Depending on the element that you have selected, the Graphic Pro-
gramming System generates an end face or aperipheral surface with
the limits dictated by the blank.
The Graphic Programming System defines end face surfaces as out-
side contours.
If an inside contour has been defined, the side of the orientation must
be checked.
Orientation
left
Selected end
face element
Fig. 4.6 End face inside contour
If the selection made is ambiguous, the system asks you to define the
type (end face or peripheral).
The surfaces that result from machining on end face surfaces or periph-
eral surfaces are paraxial.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.4.2 Editing a created surface
4.4.2 Editing a created surface

Edit
surface
Purpose You can alter or delete surfaces that you have created with the function
Edit surface.
Notes on
programming
Alter You alter the surface by making entries in a screenform.

surface The system adapts the blank definition derived from the surface.
If you alter the elements of the finished turned part

geometry which have been defined as face or
lateral surfaces, the system does not transfer the
changes to the surface definition.
Any changes made to a turned part element must
also be entered in Edit surface.
Any surfaces that you have created can be deleted with the Delete sur-
Delete
surface face function.
You can only delete a surface you have created

when you have deleted all the geometries and
machining operations created for it.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.4.3 Select surface

Select
surface
Purpose The turning plane is always the basic setting in graphic programming.
With the function select surface, select a defined plane from the
selection menu under the function Create surface (see Section 4.4.1).
This plane can either be the
S turning plane
S the end face or
S the peripheral surface
(see Fig. 4.8).
Turning plane
End
Fig. 4.7 Selection screenform for selecting a surface
Notes on Having selected a new plane in the selection menu, you enter the para-
programming meters for the start point of the tool used for machining the surface in
the Position – change of plane interactive screenform.
The Graphic Programming System takes the default values from the
empirical value file.
The system generates the following sequence on changing plane:
1. Tool approaches plane change point (CRC).
2. Plane activation.
3. Approach tool change position.
4. The Graphic Programming System starts machining.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
If you have created a part program, the system generates an End of

program (to be seen in the work schedule - Program steps function).
If you change the plane, the Graphic Programming System enables you
to delete the end of program in an interactive screenform (Delete end
of program yes).
In this way, you can add new program steps for machining.
Figure 4.8 below shows the turning plane, end face and peripheral
surface.
End faces Turning plane
+Y1 Corres- X
ponds to 0
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Radius degrees Diameter
position
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
+X1 Z
C
Corresponds to
360 degrees
Direction of
Corresponds generation
to 90 degrees
position Corresponds to
180 degrees
Direction of
generation
Corresponds to
0 degrees
Z
Peripheral surface
Coordinate zero for this
peripheral surface
Fig. 4.8 Select surface
Dimensions for the end face are always entered as

radii.
Dimensions for the turned part in the turning plane
are always entered as diameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.5 Programming for a vertical boring and turning mill
Coordinate system in The programming examples in Part 1 and the diagrams in Part 2 are
Part 1 and Part 2 of intended for turning machines with the coordinate system (machining
the User’s Guide “behind” the turning centre)) shown in Fig. 4.9.
+X
+Z
Fig. 4.9 Coordinate system Turning Part 1 and Part 2 (machining behind turning centre)
Coordinate system The following coordinate system applies to the vertical turning machine:
vertical turning
machine +Z
+X +Z
+X
Fig. 4.10 Coordinate system vertical boring and turning mill

Machining “behind” or “in front” of the turning centre
The following applies to all help displays:

S Z axis displayed horizontally
S Machining behind the turning centre
Tools The tools are defined and displayed in the correct position with refer-
ence to the machine.
A user magazine “WKZ_VOR” exists containing tools defined for a verti-
cal turning machine.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
WKZ_VOR defined for

a vertical turning
machine
Fig. 4.11 Tools for a vertical boring and turning mill
Tools provided by the graphic programming system are defined as “be-

hind the turning centre”.
The parameter Tool mounting position always refers to the Z axis.
The following sketch shows the parameter Tool mounting position.
+Z
– 90_
+ 0_
+X
Fig. 4.12 Tools for a vertical boring and turning mill
Geometry The variable “V1500” from the empirical value file defines whether you
want to graphically program with
S horizontal geometry input (V1500=0)
i.e. contours entered from right to left or vice versa, see Fig. 4.13 or
S vertical geometry input (V1500=1)
i.e. contours entered from top to bottom or vice versa, see Fig. 4.14.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Geometry
+Z
+X
Fig. 4.13 Horizontal geometry input
Geometry
+Z
+X
Fig. 4.14 Vertical geometry input
You specify whether you want to define the workpiece geometry “be-
hind” or “in front” of the turning centre in the configuring file with vari-
able “V1366” as follows:
S “V1366=0” Machining behind the turning centre
S “V1366=1” Machining in front of the turning centre.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
+Z +Z
+X
+X
Anfangspunkt Anfangspunkt
”hinter” der Drehmitte ”vor” der Drehmitte
Fig. 4.15 Geometry input “behind” or “in front” of the turning centre
9999 mm are possible for parameter input

Parameter entries for the angle are interpreted by
the graphic programming system with reference to
the Z axis.
Machining If the variables

S “V1366 = 0” (“Machining behind the turning centre”) and
S “V1498 = 1” (coordinate system “X left and Z above”)
are set in the configuring file, you are programming machining for a ver-
tical boring and turning mill and shown in Fig. 4.16.
+Z
Fig. 4.16 Vertical machining behind the turning centre, X axis left Z axis above

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.6 Creating tools and workholders graphically
Tools
Material
Purpose If you wish to

S create new workholders or
S new tools,
S add to or alter the tool masterdata
S create or expand tool magazines for your workpieces,
S add to or alter your material name list for your workpieces
use the softkey Tools Material.
Notes on The function Tools Material initializes the graphics area.

programming
If you have created a workpiece geometry and drawn this in the graph-
ics area, the programming system will save it for you.
If you end the function, the programming system loads the saved ge-
ometry for you and you continue with workpiece programming.
The loading operation takes a little time. You can tell from the informa-
tion line that the system is working.
Tools are organized in the tool masterdata catalog and in tool user mag-
azines.
Tool masterdata This catalog should contain all tools and workholders for your machine
catalog environment.
You should create in the masterdata catalog all tools and workholders
that you use in your machine.
For every tool you define:
S general tool data
S a tool geometry
S the cutting values for the different materials.
The general tool data contain amongst other things an ID number.
Every tool has its own type designation.
You determine the values for the magazine location (T No.) and the tool
offset (D) in the tool user magazine.
You put together user magazines from the masterdata catalog.
Tool user magazine Copy the tools from the masterdata catalog into a user magazine.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
The user magazine must be an image of your machine magazine and

contains the tools and workholders required for machining.
The values for the magazine location (T No.) and for the tool offset
(D No.) must have valid numbers.
Current tool If a certain tool is not suitable for the machining operation (e.g.: “Tool
magazine too short for cutoff”), you can alter or add to the tools in your user mag-
azine at any time.
Tables The following table explains the differences between masterdata and
user magazine.
Terms Masterdata User magazine
SIEMENS AG supplies with the SI- A user magazine called “DEMO-

Standard NUMERIK 840C a catalog with pre- MAG1” exists. This magazine con-
defined workholders and tools. They tains the tools for workpiece
are intended solely for the purposes “DEMO001”, “DEMO002”,
of training and initiation. “DEMO003” and “DEMO004”.
This catalog is called “WKZ”.
Tool geometry and cutting values
have been selected at random. No
executable workpiece programs can
be generated with these.
Meaning of When creating the tool master data, When generating (New magazine)
T and D No. no T and D numbers should be as- or extending (Copy tool) tool mag-
signed. azines, you must enter the T num-
ber for the magazine location and
This is in principle possible but not the D No. or D Nos. for the offset
advisable when using tool memory into the interactive screen-
management via a T number. form General tool data that ap-
The tool masterdata can contain pears on the screen.
any number of tools.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
03.95
Terms Masterdata User magazine
ID number The tool only has one type designa- see tool masterdata
tion. It contains for example:
S the manufacturer code or 0 0 00 00 0 0
S tool order number or Toolholder type
S taken together the tool-type, a
subgroup, the tool holder type or Tool type within
the diameter within one type des- basic form
ignation.
Basic form of
see user magazine tool
Type of machining
Operating
sequences
Masterdata catalog You wish to extend the masterdata catalog:
1. You are on the Machining programming level.
2. Go into programming level Tool Material / masterdata magazines.
3. Load the masterdata catalog using the function Load masterdata.
4. Alter or extend the catalog using the functions Tool or masterdata.
5. When you have stored the catalog return to the function Machining.
Current user maga- If a certain tool is not suitable for the machining operation (e.g.: “Tool
zine too short for cutoff”), you can alter or add to the tools in your user mag-
azine at any time.
1. You are on the Machining programming level.
2. Go into programming level Tools Material / Master-data magazines
/ Tools.
3. Alter or extend the tool magazine with the functions Tool and Mas-
terdata.
4. Once you have saved the user magazine return to the function Ma-
chining.
Notes On returning to the Machining menu, the programming system en-
quires whether the modified data are to be stored. In this case (save
yes)
S you change not only the data of the loaded magazine for the corre-
sponding type of machining,
S but also the files of the globally generated tool magazine.
If you load a different or create a new tool magazine during the proce-
dure described above, this does not change the user magazine defined
for the machining operation.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.6.1 Extend masterdata catalog
New
tool
Copy
tool
Purpose The masterdata catalog contains predefined workholders and tools.

New workholders and tools can be added to the master data catalog at
any time.
Notes on The SINUMERIK 840C is supplied with a masterdata catalog file

programming (“WKZ”) to be found in the SIEMENS directory.
As soon as you expand this catalog, the Graphic Programming System
copies the altered catalog as “WKZ” into the user directory.
The Graphic Programming System then always uses “WKZ” from the
user directory.
Operating
sequences
Load
masterdata 1. Load master data
Tool 2. Under the function Tool
New
tool 3. Generate a new tool then select one after the other in the interactive
screenforms the
Copy
tool S machining type and
S the tool class and then define the geometry of the tool
Change
tool or if you want to

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
S Copy tools,
S Change tools or
S Delete tools
you can search for the tools in the existing tool magazine with
S All
S T number
S D number or
S ID number
and if you are searching for several tools you can
select the tools offered block by block with the toggle key.
Confirm with the INPUT key and enter the values one after the other or
if you are deleting tools, confirm after the prompt.
4. After generating the tools, press RECALL and then
Save
masterdata 5. save master data with function Save masterdata.
S Load master data
S Generate new tool or copy existing tool and alter ID number and ge-
ometry values
S Save master data

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.6.2 Generate (new) magazine with (new) tools

New
magazine
New
tool
Copy
tool
Change
tool
Purpose You should always generate a new tool in the tool master data and then
copy it into the tool (user) magazine.
Notes on
programming
New When you generate a new tool, the Graphic Programming System
tool prompts you to enter the dimensions. Figure 4.17 below shows the in-
teractive screenform for a turning tool as an example.
Fig. 4.17 Roughing tool
For details concerning the parameters for holder, shank and tool tip,
please refer to the User’s Guide “Part 1: Programming Examples”.
The following notes refer to the parameters insert length EL and mini-
mum hole diameter BD.
Insert length EL and You use the “V1434” variable from the empirical value file to define
minimum hole diame- whether the tool leaves the end position after grooving, roughing or
ter BD finishing via the minimum hole diameter BD.
The insert length EL parameter is effective with grooving, drilling and
button tools.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Copy
tool
The function Copy tool only copies tools from the
tool masterdata catalog into the current user
magazine.
It is not possible to copy from one user magazine to
another.
When you copy, create new or change tools the Graphic Programming
System stores the tool in the magazine. If you wish to select a tool from
the magazine, you are given the following display:
Fig. 4.18 Tool description
Note (see Fig. 4.18) You can move the cursor onto the tool you wish to select in the
selection screenform, the other fields in the graphic area are
information fields supplying information on the selected tool.
See Section 4.5 for notes on tools of a vertical turning machine.
Operating As it is recommended that you always create and edit tools in the tool
sequences masterdata and then copy them into the tool (user) magazine, please
proceed as follows:
1. You are on programming level Machining.
2. Go to programming level Tools Material / Masterdata magazines.
3. Load the masterdata directfory with the function Load masterdata.
4. Edit or extend the directory with the functions Tool.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
5. Save the masterdata.

6. Load or create a user magazine.
7. Copy the tools from the masterdata into the user magazine.
8. Change the ID No., D No., T No. or geometry data, if necessary.
9. Save the current user magazine.
Change If you change tools in the magazine, you can call up the corresponding
tool parameters directly with the functions
S All
S T and D number
S Geometry data or
S Technology
(see Fig. 4.19).
Fig. 4.19 Change tool
The function All displays all interactive screen forms for the tool to be
altered.
The function T and D number enables modification of the name, T and
D number and ID text as well as feedrate interpretation.
The function Geometry data enables modification of the geometry data
and insertion position.
The function Technology enables modification of the tool cutting val-
ues.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.6.3 Tool and workholder classes

Purpose The programming system offers various tool classes and workholder
classes with standard geometries.
Tool classes
turning
Fig. 4.20 Tool classes turning
Tool classes drilling

and milling
Fig. 4.21 Tool classes drilling 1
Fig. 4.22 Tool classes milling
Tool classes
workholders
Fig. 4.23 Workholder classes
Notes on Please refer to Section 5 for a description of the available tool and
programming workholder classes.
Note If you enter “ZERO (0)” for the parameter Rounding radius (tool nose
radius) for a turning tool, the system automatically enters “0.0001”.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Operating When you program a new tool (New tool), the programming system
sequences prompts you for:
S the tool class as well as the
S dimensions and the
S technological parameters.
After you have entered the geometry data of the tool, the programming
system displays the tool in its machining position.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.7 Materials and cutting values
4.7 Materials and cutting values
When you create the tools you assign cutting values for the various
materials for each tool.
You define the different materials with the function Materials.
With the function Tools you can create or alter, for example, the tool
cutting values.
The cutting values merely serve as a suggestion for machining
definitions and can be changed at any time.
4.7.1 Materials
Material
data
Purpose The materials are organized in a list of materials. These material desig-
nations (see Fig. 4.24) are also shown in a list of materials when you
program the blank.
Fig. 4.24 Materials
The material designation is a freely assignable text. You decide whether

you enter
S individual material names or
S material groups

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
4.7.2 Cutting values
Tools
Purpose The programming system manages cutting values for 64 materials.

The 64 cutting value data are assigned to each tool.
The number of different cutting values is limited by the number of mate-
rials.
The list of materials itself assigns a number to the particular material
(see Fig. 4.24). You will find this number in the interactive screenform
for Cutting values in the line Material under No. (see Fig. 4.25 “Cutting
values”).
Notes on
programming
The No. shows you in which field in the list of materials you are located.
No. 1
The field Accept enters the parameters and displays the Cutting val-
ues interactive screenform for the next material.
You terminate the entire function by means of the

field OK.
The function OK does not accept any parameters
for the indicated material.
You can page through the material list via fields Before and Back.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Cutting values The cutting values must be entered in the interactive screen form
for turning Cutting values (s. Fig. 4.25) when generating or changing a tool
(functions New tool or Change tool).
Fig. 4.25 Cutting values for turning
The parameters in the input fields

S Speed and Cutting speed as well as
S constant Cutting speed and maximum Speed limitation
are mutually exclusive.
Feedrate Graphic help is available to explain the feedrate parameters.
(Turning)
F2 and F4 are not evaluated by the system at the present time.
With each tool change or when approaching, the

Graphic Programming System uses feed “F1” even
when it has the value “0” assigned to it.
The feedrates depend on the tool point direction for

S longitudinal turning
S relief cutting
S grooving

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
F3
X
F1
If this angle is >45° (variable “V1296”
from the empirical values file), then the
longitudinal feedrate F1 becomes the
Z transverse feedrate F3.
Fig. 4.26 Feedrates
Turning tools F1 = Longitudinal feed

F3 = Transverse feed
Grooving tools F1 = Rough grooving (infeed feed)
F1/F3 = Finish grooving ( F1 = base feed
F3 = wall feed)
Drilling tools F1 = Depth feed
F3 = Retraction feed
Thread cutting F1 = Infeed feed
For each machining operation you can redefine the cutting values from
the tool magazine. However, these changes do not affect the original
cutting values. They only apply to the programmed machining step.
The Graphic Programming System compares the cutting values for
each individual machining step with the values from the tool magazine
and then displays them as a percentage (%). If you use the values from
the tool magazine the Graphic Programming System enters 100%.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Drilling and milling As with turning, you enter the cutting values of New tool or Change
cutting values tool in the interactive screen form Cutting values (see Fig. 4.27) with
drilling and milling.
Fig. 4.27 Drilling and milling cutting values
Graphic help is available explaining the feed parameters.

The abbreviations for the feed parameters are:
S machining feedrate (FR = F2)
S plunge feedrate (FTI = F1)
S retraction feedrate (FTR = F3)
S parameter F is not evaluated by the system at the present time.
If you preset feedrates with the value “0” they are

not evaluated by the system.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
03.95
General It is possible to alter the cutting values of the tools used for each pro-
programming note grammed machining operation.
You enter the modifications with the function Program steps editing.
In addition, there are the following input fields:
S Specification of feedrate in percent (%) (see Fig. 4.28)
S Data from magazine (see Fig. 4.28)
Fig. 4.28 Cutting values interactive screenform
Values you have entered using the program step editor are used for the
machining step.
These changes have no effect, however, on the original cutting values.
They apply only to the machining step programmed.
Each material has its own cutting values.
Feedrate specification The Graphic Programming System compares the cutting value parame-
in % (Fig. 4.28) ters entered for the feedrate to the original cutting values from the tool
magazine and displays the results in percent (%).
If you use the values from the tool magazine, the Graphic Programming
System issues 100%.
Data from magazine
(Fig. 4.28)
Press this key to select the cutting values directly from the tool maga-
zine.
The changes made for the cutting values apply to

the machining step just programmed.
If you always wish to use these values, you must
edit and save the data in the magazine under the
Tools Materials function.
Operating Create or change a tool with the functions New tool or Change tool.
sequences
Once you have confirmed the tool geometry with the softkey OK, enter
the cutting values in the interactive screenform Cutting values.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8 Geometry
4.8 Geometry
Geometry
You have selected the turning plane as the active

surface.
Purpose You create the blank and finished part contour of the workpiece using
the Geometry function.
A finished part can be put together from several contours (e.g.: outside
contour, inside contour)
Note In the section below the term “Contour” stands for blank or finished
part.
For geometry creation, the Graphic Programming System distinguishes
S Oriented geometry (blank or finished part) and
S Cylinder (blank or finished part)
Oriented geometry In the case of an oriented geometry, the various construction elements
of the contour are entered in sequence from the starting to the end
point in interactive menus.
Cylinder The Graphic Programming System defines the cylinder geometry.
Please refer to the Appendix (Section 5) for the individual softkey func-
tions and menu trees under the softkey Geometry.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8.1 Oriented geometry with contour elements
Oriented
geometry
Purpose You define your workpiece contour using the menu guided element in-
put function.
The function Oriented geometry creates contours for
S turned part surfaces and for
S end faces and peripheral surfaces1)
If you use the Oriented geometry function to create

a blank (not a finished part) on the turning plane,
you must close the contour by means of the center
line.
The initial point is then the same as the end point of
the contour.
Notes on Fig. 4.29 shows an example of the Oriented geometry programming

programming function.
Fig. 4.29 Oriented geometry function

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Interactive screen After calling up the function Oriented geometry, enter the parameters
form Global contour of the global contour transitions.
transitions
Fig. 4.30 Interactive screen form Global contour transitions
Fig. 4.31 below explains the designation Left/Right:
Left
Right
Left
Y
Right
Contour
Fig. 4.31 Left, Right
The global transitions are entered for each contour edge (chamfer or
rounding).
If you subsequently change a specific transition in an interactive screen
form, the programming system overwrites the transition declared as
global at that location.
The transitions defined as global
S become effective on activating the function OK
S do not become effective with the form element Recess if this has
been declared as local (e. g. with contour editing).
The chamfers/roundings specified as local are not

affected in Edit/Global transitions.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Interactive screen In the interactive screen form Initial point you define the parameters
form Initial point for the initial point of the geometry to be constructed. The dimensions
always refer to the current coordinate origin.
Fig. 4.32 Initial point
Entering geometry In the empirical value file you can specify with variable “V1496”
elements
“V1496 = 0”
to program the geometry elements via the horizontal softkey bar with
functions
S Line right (with angle 0_),
S Line left (with angle 180_),
S Line up (with angle 90_),
S Line down (with angle 270_),
S Line any (with any angle),
S Arc left (ccw)
S Arc right (cw)
“V1496 = 1”
with the cursor keypad.
The following Fig. 4.33 appears in the graphic field.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fig. 4.33 Geometry element input via cursor keypad
You can create the geometry elements one after the other by operating
the relevant cursor key.
Note To move in the log line you must close the displayed keypad display
with the ESC key and then position the cursor on a new element. You
can activate the keypad again with the function Geometry elements.
Contour elements A contour consists of contour elements and contour transition ele-
ments. Starting with the initial point of the contour, you join the ele-
ments together or insert elements.
The elements are:
S initial point
S straight lines
S arcs
You can add the following transition elements to the ends of these ele-
ments:
S chamfer
S radius
S form element.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Interactive screen There are two possibilities of defining the contour with the contour ele-
form for a contour ments Line or Arc.
element S minimum parameter input with simple parameter block or
S complete parameter input with complete parameter block
The following table gives an overview about the possible parameters in
each case:
Graphic
Ele- Simple set of Complete set
parameter
ment parameters of parameters
description
X E
S dEX
EX
Line
dEZ
Z
EZ
Line E
X
L AS
AT
S
X
CCW
E
RD
EX dEZ S
dEX dCX dCX
CX
CW
Z
EZ
CZ
Arc
ASS
X AT
RD
E AA S
ASE
The absolute dimension refers to the current origin of coordinates.

The incremental dimension refers to the element defined last.
If you have created the contour and programmed the machining op-
eration, the Graphic Programming System does not take into account
the machining operation with alteration or deletion of the contour.
If these parameters do not describe the contour element completely,
the system calculates the remaining unknown parameters on the basis
of adjacent contour elements (as far as possible).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Parameter input The following table gives more information on:
Term Explanation
Element definition is possible either with Cartesian

or with polar parameters.
Note:
If you alter the input system while defining an ele-
Cartesian/ ment, all user inputs must be deleted, i.e. all values
polar not followed by one of the characters “ + ”, “ – ” or
parameters “ = ” and transition angle AT as well as chamfers
and roundings.
The input fields of the Cartesian system that you
have not selected are information fields and cannot
be overwritten.
The interactive screen form of a contour element
contains information fields (grey) with preset param-
Information eters.
fields
These values have been calculated by the program-
ming system and cannot be modified.
Input fields that are open (i.e. have no entry) are
defined with known parameters.
Parameters calculated by the system are marked in
the input fields.
Input fields They have the following meaning:
S “ = ” directly calculated value
S “ + ” rounded-up value
S “ – ” rounded-down value
Values in display fields preset with “ = ”, “ + ” or “ – ”
by the programming system cannot be overwritten.
Calculated The input fields can be overwritten only if you delete
parameters the parameters from which the system calculates
the resulting values and if there are no values in the
display fields.
Value input for Input for the X-axis is always as diameter. This ap-
diameter plies to E_X as well as to dE_X.
E_X The dimension of the parameters E_X and E_Z is
(End point X), absolute and refers to the current coordinate origin
E_Z (not initial point IP).
(End point Z)
The dimension of the parameters dE_X and dE_Z is
dE_X, dE_Z
incremental and refers to the element defined last.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Term Explanation
Roundings or chamfers are entered directly in the

interactive screenforms.
Rounding, The roundings or chamfers refer to the contour tran-
chamfer sition to the previous element.
The global transition preset (see following page) is
overwritten.
Generally, angle indications refer to the direction
of the element.
If the input field Transition AT is not overwritten,
the Graphic Programming System defines the
transition as tangential.
The following sketches describe the parameter
Transition AT:
X AT = 0 (tangential
transition)
AS = slope
Z AT = transition
“+” AT = positive “+” AS = positive
X
Angle
indications
Z
“–”AT = negative
X
“+” AS = positive
“+” AS = positive
Z
Contour Transition elements are chamfers and roundings
transition and refer to the previous element.
elements

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Information line The individual elements that you have programmed are displayed by
the Graphic Programming System in the information line underneath the
graphic range.
This gives you an overview of the elements that have already been in-
put. Observe the following for the information line:
S Abbreviations of the contour elements in the information line:
– IP = Initial point of the oriented geometry or contour
– LI = Line
– BR = Arc right
– BL = Arc left
– RS = Recess
– UC = Undercut
– TH = Thread
– TU = Thread undercut.
S Colours
The abbreviated designations in the information line and the ele-
ments of the geometry have different colours:
– Yellow Start point
– Blue Defined element
– White Incompletely defined element
(contour element cannot be represented)
– Red Contour element selected by the cursor
– Grey Elements behind the present contour point
S Insert
The programming system inserts the next contour element to the
right of the cursor that points to a contour element.
If you position the cursor on one of the grey-coloured contour ele-
ments, the programming system joins the inserted elements to the
following elements.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
S Operation:
The following table explains the function of the keys in the informa-
tion line:
Keys Explanation
Press these keys to move the cursor within the in-

formation line.
If a contour element can already be displayed, that
element is marked in the graphics area.
If you want to insert contour elements, move the
cursor to the respective point in the information line
by means of these keys.
Press this key to place the cursor on the initial point.
Press this key to place the cursor on the last ele-

ment.
If the cursor is positioned on a geometry element,

you can
activate the respective interactive screenform of the
element with the INPUT key and change the param-
eters.
If the cursor is positioned on a contour element, you
can
delete this element with the Erase key.
If a contour element is marked with “ * ” (e.g.: *LI)
and the cursor is positioned on this element, you
can
display the construction variant of this element in
the graphic range by pressing this key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Softkey functions for If conflicts occur, you must alter the parameters accordingly.
editing the contour
With the softkey function Edit elements you can:
elements
S alter or delete elements
Operating sequences:
Keys Explanation
Edit 1. Use the function Edit elements to change

elements elements and the contour.
2. Select the element that you wish to alter

with the cursor keys and activate either the
function Change element or Delete ele-
ment.
3. You edit the parameters of the selected ele-

Change ment in the relevant interactive screenform
element with the function Change element.
You erase the selected element with the
Erase function Erase element.
element
S Select variant
When defining a contour, it can occur that two variants are offered
as alternatives from the given parameters for the shape of the con-
tour.
The Graphic Programming System marks these elements with “ * ”
(e.g.: *BR) in the information line.
Keys Explanation
Edit 1. Use the function Edit elements to change

elements elements and the contour.
2. Move the cursor with the cursor keys to the

element whose variant you want to alter.
This element is marked with “*” in the in-
formation line.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Keys Explanation
3. You can alter the selection via this softkey

Select function Select variant. Press this key.
variant
The Graphic Programming System uses dif-
green ferent colors (green and yellow) to display
the construction variants.
yellow 4. Selection is made by pressing one of the

softkey functions green or yellow.
Error messages The following table gives you detailed information on the error
messages:
Error
message Explanation Remedy
You may have selected

different coordinate
systems and the
parameters do not match.
or
If you want, for example, to
edit the initial point IP, then:
Possibly, the 1. Reset the input fields of
element definition
the parameters for the
does not match
with the elements next element (press
“Parameters space key to delete).
before or after this
contradictory”
element (for The Graphic Program-
example when ming System repre-
editing a contour sents an undefined ele-
definition).
ment in the info line in
“white”.
2. Edit the new parame-
ters for the IP.
3. Edit the known parame-
ters for the next ele-
ment.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.8.2 Form elements
4.8.2 Form elements

Form
elements
Purpose You can insert the individual form elements at any point on the contour.
The form elements are:
S Recess
S Undercut
S Thread
S Thread undercut
Fig. 4.34 shows the programming level form elements.
Fig. 4.34 Programming level form elements
Note on variable The variable “V1407” determines whether you make allowance for the
“V1407” from the em- form elements when machining with relief cutting (see page 4-121).
pirical values file
You can select form elements (e.g.: Recess) on which the Graphic Pro-
gramming System performs relief cutting on the finish cut.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
4.8.2 Form elements
Notes on
programming
You define a symmetrical recess with the function Recess.

Recess
The recess operation is paraxial (see figure on the left).

W
(Asymmetrical recesses see Chapter “Contour grooving” page 4–152).
You can construct symmetrical recesses as a geometry element both
transversely and longitudinally or at outside or inside contours.
D Previous
element
outside
X
RO
inside D
A
BI
Fig. 4.35 Parameters for symmetrical recess for longitudinal machining
inside
W BI
outside
RO
Fig. 4.36 Parameters for symmetric recess for face machining
S W = Recess width as Width below

S A = Edge angle
S D = Recess depth as depth
S BI = Chamfer inside
S BO = Chamfer outside
S RI = Rounding inside
S RO = Rounding outside

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.8.2 Form elements
Define the depth D with a negative value if you want

a downward recess (outside contour).
Define the depth D with a positive value if you want
an upward recess (inside contour).
You enter the width W as an incremental value
“without” a sign.
If you have selected a recess e.g. chamfer-cham-
fer, the Graphic Programming System defines it as
a Simple recess if no parameters have been en-
tered for the chamfers.
Define the undercut according to DIN 509 using the following functions:
Undercut
S DIN Form E (see Fig. 4.37)
S DIN Form F (see Fig. 4.37) or “freely” using the functions
S Longitudinal (see Fig. 4.39)
S Face (see Fig. 4.39)
FORM E
for workpieces with

one surface for
X R DE machining
DI
Z
FORM F
for workpieces with

two surfaces for
X machining that are
positioned at right
angles to each other
Fig. 4.37 Undercut Form E and F
Notes Select your undercut according to DIN 509 from the table with prede-
fined dimensions (see Fig. 4.38):
S the diameter range DI.
Fig. 4.38 Table for undercut according to DIN 509

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8.2 Form elements
This results in the radius R and depth DE.

Once you have programmed both straight lines, the Graphic Program-
ming System displays the undercut.
The Graphic Programming System converts the values in the table into
inches if you have set the variable “V1240” for “inch” dimension system
in the empirical values file.
You can use the Face and Longitudinal functions to define undercuts.
Fig. 4.39 below illustrates such undercuts with the parameters Length
and Depth.
X Longitudinal
Length
Depth
Z
Depth
X
Face
Length
Fig. 4.39 Longitudinal and face undercut

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.8.2 Form elements
You create a thread element by first constructing a straight line as an

Thread element and then assigning a thread to this straight line element.
There are two ways of assigning a thread to a constructed straight line.
1st possibility You are on programming level Geometry/Create_new/Finished part/
Oriented_geometry.
Open next screenform

here and enter values
Fig. 4.40 Straight line with thread
Construct an element Line left/right/up/down/any.

In the displayed interactive screenform you assign a thread to this ele-
ment by
opening a continuation form Thread and entering your values.
The following screen form displays a selection field for the Undercut.
2nd possibility You are on programming level Geometry/Create_new/Finished part/
Form elements/.
Fig. 4.41 Form element thread
The cursor control is positioned on a constructed line element. Describe

the thread with the function Thread.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8.2 Form elements
For example: M “60” x “1.5”

These values define
S the depth of the thread for stock removal operation Thread
S the form of the thread undercut.
Thread The geometry of the thread undercut depends on

undercut S the thread pitch P or
S the diameter of the lines.
Once you have entered the thread pitch, the programming system
works out the diameter of the programmed lines (previous element).
Here also, the programming system differentiates according the stan-
dardized forms (DIN 76). These are:
S Form A, the regular form
S Form B, the short thread undercut, and
S a thread undercut in INCH
The display below shows the definition for thread undercut Form A
and B.
A
X Regular form
f1 P Form A
Z f1 = 3 V P
A
X
f1 P Short thread
undercut Form B
Z f1 = 2 V P
Fig. 4.42 Thread undercut form A and B
The thread undercut is an add-on element for the

thread element.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8.2 Form elements
You differentiate between an

S outside thread or
S inside thread
when programming the thread undercut.
You can add the thread undercut to a
S Thread end (1) or
S the Thread beginning (2).
Always pay attention to the direction of construction.
Cursor is Cursor is
positioned on positioned on
this element this element
Straight Thread
Thread beginning (2) Thread end (1) X
Direction of construction
Fig. 4.43 Example thread undercut Beginning/End
The cursor in the log line is always positioned on the

element before the undercut when the thread under-
cut is being generated or edited.
In the example in Fig. 4.43 the cursor is positioned

S for the undercut Thread end (1) on the previous element Thread
S for the undercut Thread beginning (2) on the previous element
Straight.
The thread undercut is included in the thread length.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Operating
sequences
Oriented Create the contour using the function Oriented geometry.

geometry
If you are calling the function for the first time you will find the function
Form elements one programming level higher.
Press the RECALL key
Form and select the function Form elements.

elements

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.8.3 Cylinder
4.8.3 Cylinder
Cylinder
Purpose With the function Cylinder you describe the blank and finished part
contour.
Notes on If you construct a cylinder contour you can then always define this
programming contour as a hollow cylinder (parameter XP).
You define
S the reference point for constructing the cylinder contour,
S the distance from the reference point to the zero point (W) along the
Z axis (ZP),
S the outside diameter (D) of the cylinder,
S the inside parameter (XP) and
S the length (L).
Fig. 4.44 Interactive screenform cylinder

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.8.4 Copy contour or elements

Copy
contour
Purpose Select the function Copy contour if you want to copy or move contour
elements or whole contours.
The display below shows programming level Geometry/Copy_contour.
Fig. 4.45 Copy contour
Notes on The softkey functions and the information line guide you through the
programming operations.
The function Copy contour refers either to
S whole contours or
S individual contour elements.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Operating se-
quences
for copying whole

contour definitions 1. Select the contour with the cursor keys.
2. Confirm your selection with the INPUT key.
3. End your selection with INPUT if you do not wish to select any fur-
ther contour definitions or elements.
4. Enter parameters in interactive screenform Copy and confirm with
INPUT.
Copying contour
elements 1. Select the function Contour definition start and select an element
with the Crosshair + INPUT.
This element is the beginning of the contour definition to be copied.
2. Select the function Contour definition end and select an end ele-
ment with the Crosshair + INPUT.
3. Confirm your selection with the INPUT key.
4. Enter the parameters in the displayed interactive screenform Copy.
5. Confirm the parameters with the INPUT key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.9 Geometry end face/peripheral
4.9 Geometry end face/peripheral
Geometry
You have selected an end face or peripheral

surface as the active surface.
Purpose Using the function Geometry, create the finished part contour of the
workpiece.
Notes on In the following section, the term “contour” covers the terms “blank,
programming contour and groove”.
In geometry construction, the Graphic Programming System
distinguishes between
S oriented geometry,
S standard geometry and
S construction geometry input.
Value input All positions on the end face are entered as radii.
Oriented geometry The oriented geometry is entered step by step via menu-driven contour
input of the construction elements, from the initial point to the end point.
See Section 4.8.1 for notes on programming the

function Oriented geometry.
Standard geometry The Graphic Programming System suggests frequently used geome-
tries as standard geometries (e.g. rectangle, circle ....).
Construction
geometry If not all the dimensions have been stated in a drawing for contour
elements and can only be derived from references to other contour
elements, construction geometry has to be used.
You enter any construction elements in no particular order and then
define a contour.
Please refer to the Appendix for the individual softkey functions and
menu trees under the softkey Geometry.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.9.1 Construction geometry

Construction
geometry
Purpose If you do not make use of standard geometry (rectangle, circle, n-cor-
ner) for generating a workpiece contour, or if the dimensioning of the
individual contour elements is not complete, then the Graphic Program-
ming System offers the possibility of constructing any workpiece con-
tour made up of construction geometry elements. The Construction
geometry softkey is provided for this purpose.
In this section, all construction possibilities of point, line and circle are
listed in tabular form.
Notes on
programming
Construction For a contour construction of your own design, you first of all build up
geometry elements construction geometry elements, that is points, lines and circles.
You place the contour on these construction geometry elements.
More than forty possible definitions are available for this purpose.
Lines have no initial and end points, in other words no boundary is
given, and circles are always full circles.
The angles can be entered as required.
or
The sequence of programming the construction elements does not

have to be the same as the later sequence in the contour.
Contour The direction of the contour is also specified later when the contour def-
inition is made. You require an initial point and an end point which you
also have to define beforehand. The initial point can be identical to the
end point.
You cannot save the designed geometry with the

construction elements until contour definition has
been completed. Automatic saving also takes place
only after contour definition has been completed.
If you require intermediate storage of construction
elements generated, you create a minimum contour
(point, line, point) on the elements and press the OK
softkey to end the design. You can then save the
geometry together with its construction elements
and continue the definition with the Geometry/edit
function.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Select zero point Value inputs always refer to a reference point. For example, the work-
piece reference point or another previously defined reference point.
When the Select zero point key is pressed, the workpiece zero point is
selected.
The function Numeric input refers to the workpiece zero point.
Angle The following origin applies for angle definition:
90° or –270°
180° or –180° 0° or 360°
270° or –90°
Fig. 4.46 Angle definition
The size of the angle increases counterclockwise.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Tables The following tables show all the designing possibilities.

The table below describes the designing possibilities for points.
Point
Help graphics Definition Explanation
Point = Reference point, You design a point starting from a

horizontal value, reference point by entering the
vertical value horizontal and vertical values:
1. Select the reference point
2. Enter numeric values for hori-
zontal (X value) and vertical (Y
value)
Fig. 4.47
Point = Reference point, You design a point starting from a
distance, angle reference point by entering the
distance and the angle:
1. Select the reference point
2. Enter the numeric values for dis-
tance and angle
Fig. 4.48
Point = 2 reference lines You design a point of intersection of
two reference lines:
1. Select first reference line
2. Select second reference line
Point = 1 reference line, You design a point of intersection of
1 reference circle, a reference line and a reference
location circle:
1. Select reference line
2. Select reference circle
3. Select the appropriate one from
the solutions offered for the point
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Point = 2 reference circles, You design a point of intersection of

location two reference circles:
1. Select first reference circle
2. Select second reference circle
3. Select the right point from the
solutions offered (location).
Point = 2 reference points You design a point in the middle
between two reference points:
1. Select first reference point
2. Select second reference point
Point = 1 reference point, You design a mirrored point at a

1 reference line reference line:
1. Select the reference point to be
mirrored
2. Select the reference line to the
used for mirroring
3. Press OK to confirm the interac-
tive form opened.
Fig. 4.49
Point = 1 reference circle You design the center of a reference
circle:
2. Select and confirm numeric val-
ues
Fig. 4.50

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
The table below describes the designing possibilities for lines.

Line
Line = 2 reference points You draw a line through two

reference points:
1. Select first reference point,
Line = 1 reference point, angle You design a line with a specific
angle through one reference point:
1. Select reference point
2. Enter numeric value for angle
Fig. 4.51
Line = 1 reference line, You design a line parallel to the
distance, location reference line:
2. Enter numeric value for distance
Fig. 4.52
3. Select the correct one from the

offered solutions for the line
(location)
Linie = 2 reference lines You design a mirrored line:
1. Select first reference line about
which mirroring is required
which is to be mirrored

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Line = 1 reference point, You design a line through a

1 reference line, angle reference point with an angle
referred to a reference line:
3. Enter numeric value for angle.
Line = 1 reference point, You design a line through a

1 reference circle, reference point with this line
location touching a reference circle:
solutions offered for the line
(location)
Line = 1 reference circle, You design a line which touches a
angle location reference circle at a certain angle:
2. Enter numeric value for angle
Fig. 4.53

(location)
Line = 2 reference circles, You design a line which is a tangent
location to two reference circles:
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Line = 1 reference line, You design a line parallel to the

1 reference circle, reference line and tangential to the
location reference circle:
(location).
Line = 1 reference point, You design a line, displaced
horizontal value, horizontally and vertically starting
vertical value, angle from a reference point, and an
angle:
2. Enter horizontal (X) and vertical
(Y) numeric values for the dis-
placed point and the angle at
which the line runs through the
point.
Fig. 4.54
Line = 1 reference point, You design a line starting from a
2 x horizontal values, specific reference point through two
2 x vertical values points by:
1. Selecting the reference point
2. Entering the numeric values for
the two points through which the
line runs.
X value = horizontal
Y value = vertical
Fig. 4.55

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
The table below describes the designing possibilities for circles.

Circle
Circle = 1 reference point, radius You design a circle around a

reference point with a certain
radius:
2. Enter numeric value for radius.
In this case, the X and Y values
remain 0.
Fig. 4.56
Circle = 1 reference point, You design a circle through a
1 reference line, radius reference point, the circle being
location tangential to a reference line and
enter a radius:
3. Enter numeric value for radius
Fig. 4.57

solutions offered for the circle
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 2 reference lines, You design a circle tangential to two

radius, location reference lines:
Fig. 4.58

(location)
Circle = 1 reference line, You design a circle tangential to a
1 reference circle, reference line and a reference
radius, location circle:
Fig. 4.59

(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 2 reference circles, You design a circle tangential to two

radius, location reference circles:
Fig. 4.60

(location)
Circle = 1 reference circle, You design a circle which is
radius difference concentric to the reference circle:
2. Enter numeric value for the ra-
dius difference (+/–).
Fig. 4.61

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 1 reference point, Starting from a reference point, you

horizontal value, design a new center and the
vertical value, corresponding circle:
radius
2. Enter the numeric values for the
radius of the circle as well as for
the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y)
displacement of the center re-
ferred to the reference point
Fig. 4.62
Circle = 2 reference points You design a circle with a reference
point as its center and the second
reference point as its radius:
1. Select first reference point as
center
2. Select second reference point as
radius
tive form displayed or enter other
radius as numeric value
Fig. 4.63

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 1 reference circle, You mirror a circle at a reference

1 reference line line:
1. Select reference circle to be mir-
rored
2. Select reference line to be used
for mirroring
3. Confirm by pressing OK the in-
teractive screenform offered un-
der numeric. In this case the
value for the radius remains 0.
Fig. 4.64
Circle = 1 reference circle, You design a circle tangential to a
1 reference line line and a circle:
3. Enter numeric radius
(location)
Circle = 2 reference points, You design a circle which runs
radius, location through two reference points:
2. Select second refeence point
Fig. 4.65

(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 1 reference point, You design a circle running through

1 reference circle, a reference point and tangential to
radius, location the reference circle:
Fig. 4.66
4. Select the correct solution from

those offered for the circle (loca-
tion).
Circle = 1 reference point, You design a circle with a reference
1 reference line point as its center and tangential to
a reference line:
tive form offered or enter nu-
meric value for another radius of
the tangential circle
Fig. 4.67

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 1 reference point, You design a circle with a reference

1 reference circle point as its center and tangential to
a reference circle:
tive form offered or enter nu-
meric value for other radius of
the tangential circle.
Fig. 4.68
Circle = 3 reference points You design a circle which runs
through three reference points:
3. Select third reference point
Circle = 2 reference points, You design a circle running through
1 reference line, location two reference points and tangential
to a reference line:
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Circle = 2 reference points, You design a circle which runs

1 reference circle, through two reference points and is
location tangential to a reference circle:
(location)
Circle = 1 reference point, You design a circle which runs
2 reference lines, through a reference point and is
location tangential to two reference lines:
(location)
Circle = 3 reference lines, You design a circle which is
location tangential to three reference lines:
3. Select third reference line
(location)
1 reference line, through a reference point and which
1 reference circle, is a tangent to a circle and a line:
location
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)

2 reference circles, through a reference point and
location touches two reference circles as a
tangent:
(location)
Circle = 2 reference lines, You design a circle which touches
1 reference circle, two reference lines and a reference
location circle as a tangent:
(location)
Circle = 1 reference line, You design a circle which touches a
2 reference circles, reference line and two reference
location circles as a tangent:
(location)
Circle = 3 reference circles, You design a circle which touches
location three reference circles as a tangent:
3. Select third reference circle
(location)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.9.2 Standard geometry
4.9.2 Standard geometry

Standard
geometry
Purpose The Graphic Programming System allows you to call up frequently used
blank or contour geometries such as
S Rectangle
S Circle
S n-corner
under the function Standard geometry.
If you create a groove contour, the system offers
S Elongated hole
S Rectangular groove
S Annular groove
S n-corner groove
S Radial groove
S Circumferential groove
as groove Standard geometry.
Notes on
programming
n-corner The outer circle of an n-corner always touches the corners and is not
tangential to (for example) the roundings (see Fig. 4.69).
Fig. 4.69 n-corner parameters

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.9.3 Holes
4.9.3 Holes
Holes
Purpose When creating a group of hole points, you have to know a few special
things:
S creating a user-defined group of hole points
S concealing hole points in a group
Notes on
programming
Creating a user- A user-defined hole pattern is made up of

defined group of
hole points
Point
S various individual points
Row of
points S rows of points
Circle of
points S circles of points
Point box
S boxes of points.
Define point elements Before creating the user-defined hole pattern, generate a construction
point from the elements line or circle as described under Construction
geometry. You generate a point group directly with the functions row of
points, circle of points or point box.
Define hole pattern With the function Define hole pattern you create a hole pattern on the
previously constructed point elements as described under Define con-
tour (construction geometry).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.9.3 Holes
Operating
sequences
Define point elements
1. Go into the programming level Geometry/Create new/Holes/Any
hole pattern.
2. Create point elements under the softkey function Const. geo ele-
ments.
3. You obtain the point elements with the functions
S Point
S Line
S Circle
S Row of points
S Circle of points
S Point box
4. Under the softkey function Define pattern you produce a hole pat-
tern on the point elements.
Define hole pattern
1. Select Define pattern.
2. Select point elements.
3. The softkey function Accept confirms the entire pattern of hole
points.
4. The softkey function OK ends definition of the hole pattern.
Concealing hole
points 1. Go into the programming level Geometry/Create new/Holes/Any
hole pattern.
2. Press the softkey function Define pattern.
3. Select a point structure.
4. The selected group of hole points are marked in red by the program-
ming system.
5. The information line requests you to “Conceal single points from the
point pattern”.
6. You select the single point by positioning the crosshair on the point
which is to the concealed.
7. The point is concealed by pressing the INPUT key. The red highlight-
ing is switched off.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
4.9.3 Holes
Inverse
8. If you activate the function Inverse the programming system re-
verses the active/passive holes.
Note This function helps you if there are a large number of holes but only
a few of these are required.
9. The function Accept ends input of the point pattern.
If the starting plane is given, create the geometry as described for
the function Holes.
4.9.4 Groove
Groove
Purpose For a description of the groove functions, please refer to Section 5.
Notes on If you use the Oriented geometry function for generating a groove, you
programming construct the centre line of the groove.
The system generates two contour elements:
S the centre line of the groove and
S the groove itself
When processing the groove, select the appropriate geometry element.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.10 Machining
4.10 Machining
Machining
You have selected the turning plane as the active

surface.
Purpose You use the Machining softkey function when you

S machine the programmed workpiece contour with the different turn-
ing technologies.
Notes on
programming
Interactive
screenforms Some of the parameters appear as default values in the interactive
screenforms. The programming system takes these values from an
empirical value file (see Section 4.2).
The Graphic Programming System has

an extensive help system. For nearly
every input field you can call up help
graphics with the Help key.
General You can execute the following machining operations with the Graphic
Programming System:
S roughing (rough turning)
S finishing (finish turning)
S thread cutting (thread turning)
S grooving
S concentric drilling
The following sections described possible procedures for this machining
function. Some of the parameters for rough turning and finish turning
are described in more detail.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.10 Machining
How do you program You need the following for graphically programming machining opera-
turning operations? tions:
S A tool magazine
The select the tool magazine for workholders and tools.
S A workholder:
You choose the workholder most suitable for the type of machining.
S Tools
You select a suitable tool for the machining operation.
S The cutting direction:
Yes select face or longitudinal machining.
S The machining definition:
The Graphic Programming System deduces the machining definition
from the selected tool.
S Stock removal strategy:
You define the general strategy for the machining operation.
S The stock removal segment:
You determine the segment to be stock removed graphically with an
initial and end position.
You define a stock removal strategy for these positions.
Stock removal The segment is defined as a surface which is enclosed by a finished
segment part contour and a blank contour.
This segment is the surface which you define for machining in the longi-
tudinal section.
Using these input values the WOP calculates the cut segmentation for
the stock removal for each segment.
This User’s Guide will describe how you create a stock removal seg-
ment later on in the documentation.
Using different strategies the Graphic Programming System machines
the selected stock removal segment.
At the same time the blank is continuously updated, i.e. after each cut,
the part of the workpiece that has just been machined is regarded as no
longer existing.
This has several advantages:
S Infeed in rapid traverse each time goes right up to the material.
S If you have defined an additional machining operation to start
straight after the first one, the Graphic Programming System can
take account of the current blank contour when executing the next
approach movement.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.1 Magazine for tools and workholders
4.10.1 Magazine for tools and workholders
Fig. 4.70 Interactive screenform Magazine
Purpose You use a magazine which contains tools and workholders for the ma-
chining operation you wish to carry out.
The magazine can either be a user magazine or the masterdata maga-
zine.
Notes on You define whether you want to load tool masterdata or a user
programming magazine in the interactive screenform Magazine that appears on the
screen.
User magazines already contain the correct T and D values.
Fig. 4.71 Interactive screenform General tool data
If you are working with the master data, you complete the relevant val-
ues for magazine location T and tool offsets D in the General tool data
screenform.
If tools are missing in the active magazine, you can alter or add to the
contents at any time on programming level Tools Material/Master data
magazine.
You can replace the loaded magazine with another using the function
Edit program step (see Section 4.16.2 ).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.10.2 Beginning of program
Fig. 4.72 Interactive screenform Beginning of program
Purpose You enter the following in the interactive screenform Beginning of

program:
S type of program
S program number
S comments for the part program
S machine plane assignment and
S max. speed.
Notes on The entries that you make for the program type and program number
programming give you the program name of the part program.
Main program
MPF3
Program No. 3
Subroutine
SPF100
Program No. 100
The drawing no. etc appear as comments in the part program.

The Graphic Programming System generates the part program when
you operate the function Create part prog.
You can enter the machining position in the selection fields for Machine
plane G18.
Spindle (1st clamping device) 2nd clamping device
Workpiece
+X +X
Position for G18 Z+ X+ Position for G18 Z– X+

+Z –Z
Fig. 4.73 Machine plane

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
When you operate the function Create part program the Graphic Pro-
gramming System converts the geometry and machining information to
the position.
The Graphic Programming System converts information entered for the
max. speed into an NC block at the beginning of the part program.
For example: “N004 G26 S6000 LF”
The Graphic Programming System compares the entered value for
max. speed with a speed value from the empirical value file (“V1381”).
If the value entered in the input field max. speed is larger it is reset.
Note The output of “G26” can be configured by the machine manufacturer.
4.10.3 Workholders
Workholder
selection
The User’s Guide explains in Part 1 how you create

a workholder with an example.
The User’s Guide describes in Part 1 how you
activate a workholder with an example.
When you call up the workholder for the first time the Graphic Program-
ming System positions it correctly on the blank contour.
With the softkey function Move you bring the workholder into the cor-
Move rect position for clamping the workpiece.
You select a certain workholder and deactivate it for machining.

Deactivate
If you want to move a workholder, always enter the

incremental value from its current position with sign.
Turn the workpiece to reclamp. The system calculates an imaginary

Reclamping axis from the original blank through the centre of the workpiece and
mirrors the workpiece.
Once the workpiece is mirrored you can select a new workholder with
the function Workholder selection. The graphic programming system
recognizes the finished part last machined and clamps directly on the
finished part.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
4.10.4 Operating sequences for turning
functions
4.10.4 Operating sequences for turning functions

Situation
S A tool magazine is loaded.
S The workholder is positioned.
You select the function Turning.
Turning
Always follow this general sequence of operations when graphically
programming any turning operation:
General sequence of
operations
1. Select the turning function
2. Select tool
3. Select Face or Longitudinal
Note There are tools that both face machine and machine longitudinally.
4. Machining definition
Note The Graphic Programming System derives the direction and type of
machining (e.g. outside or inside, to spindle or form chuck) from the
tool edge geometry.
A screenform for machining can be displayed by entering a variable.
Fig. 4.74 Interactive screenform Face roughing
The empirical value file contains a variable

“V1367” with which you define whether you wish
to have the interactive screenform displayed at
this point.
You can always access this interactive screen-
form under the function Edit program steps (see
Section 4.16.2).
5. Select contour
6. Define general stock removal parameters and strategy
7. Define machining starting point and its approach strategy
8. Define machining end point and its retraction strategy
9. The Graphic Programming System calculates the cut segmentation
from these values and displays them in the graphic field.
The function Tool selection is described below.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.5 Tool selection

Tool Select the function Tool selection.
selection
Purpose With this function you define the tool change point and select a tool
from the loaded tool magazine.
Notes on
programming
Situation
S A turning function has been selected.
Select the function Tool selection.
Tool
selection You define the tool change position in the Tool change point interac-
tive screenform.
Fig. 4.75 Tool change point
The parameters of the interactive screenform Plane position (only

possible with the C-axis option) correspond to those of the interactive
screenform Tool change point.
Empirical values file The variables V1220 (X axis) and V1221 (Z axis) in the empirical values
variables V1220 and file define the first tool change point.
V1221
The tool description in the interactive screenform

Tool change point always refers to the previous
tool.
When you call up a tool for the first time there is no
name in the Description and the T no. is “0”.
On the first tool change (T no.: “0”, D no.: “0”) the tool turret (magazine)
travels to the tool change point without tool offset.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
03.95
Fig. 4.76 below illustrates the parameters

S workpiece zero W
S theoretical tool tip P
S tool reference point F
S tool change position
for the tools required for an outside or inside machining operation.
Î
Î
F
ÎÎ
ÎÎ P
A X
Tool change position
in X or Z Werkzeug–Bezu
Î
Î
P
Z
Workpiece zero W
A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Tool reference point F
View A
Theoretical
tool tip P
Tool nose
radius centre-
point
Fig. 4.76 Parameters for tool change
Reference points for Variable “V1380” defines whether the reference point for tool change is
tool change
S the theoretical tool tip P or
S the tool reference point F.
The Graphic Programming System always uses workpiece zero W as
basis.
Notes on variable The variable “V1380” is defined by the machine tool manufacturer:
“V1380”
S If “V1380=1”, then the tool change point refers to the tool reference
point F without length compensation (e.g.: D0),
S If “V1380=0”, then the tool change point refers to the theoretical tool
tip P with length compensation (e.g.: D1).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Tool travel to tool For positioning the tool on the point Position in X or Z, you can select:
change position
X/Z – first X then Z
Z/X – first Z then X
XZ – simultaneously
X – in X (optimized path for outside machining)
Z – in Z (optimized path for inside machining)
Note The graphic representation in the graphics area always shows you the
path of the theoretical tool tip to the tool change point.
The Graphic Programming System considers tool plus tool holder for
collision detection.
The table below shows the retract strategies depending on variable
“V1380”, with the conditions:
S The tool change position is defined by X=150 and Z=150.
S The tool has completed the machining operation.
The DIN code contains the parameter “L” for the length dimension and
the parameter “Q” for the cross dimension of the tool referred to the tool
reference point.
Variable “V1380” = 1
Retract Variable “V1380”= 0
(without length compensa-
strategy (with length compensation)
tion)
in X and then in Z
in X and then in Z
X/Z
N100 X150 ; with N100 X150–L ; with

N105 Z150 ; with N105 D0 Z150 ; without
in Z and then in X
in Z and then in X
Z/X
N100 Z150 ; with N100 Z150–Q ; with

N105 X150 ; with N105 D0 X150 ; without

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Variable “V1380” = 1
Retract Variable “V1380”= 0
(without length
strategy (with length compensation)
compensation)
Tool change position in X and Z
in X and Z
XZ
N100 X150 Z150 ; with tool N100 X150 D0 Z150 ; without

radius compensation

X Tool change position in X
in X
N100 X150 ; with N100 X150–L ; with

N105 X150 Z150+Q D0 ; without
Tool change position in Z
in Z
N100 Z150 ; with N100 Z150–Q ; with

N105 Z150 X150+L D0 ; without
The tool has completed the machining operation.

The tool change position is defined, for example, by X=150 and Z=150.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96
Functions for If you select tools, you can call up the corresponding tool directly with
tool selection the following functions (see Fig. 4.77).
S All
S T number
S D number
S ID number or
S Geometry data
Fig. 4.77 Functions for tool selection
The function All enables selection of all tools in the magazine.

The function T, D or ID number enables direct selection of the tool of
the corresponding T, D or ID number.
The function Geometry data enables selection of a defined tool accord-
ing to a search pattern for the geometry specifically needed for the ma-
chining operation (see Fig. 4.78).
Fig. 4.78 Tool selection according to geometry data

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.10.6 Cutting
direction
4.10.6 Cutting direction

Face Longit.
... or ...
Purpose The cutting direction Face or Longitudinal defines the infeed and ma-
chining direction
Notes on Fig. 4.79 below shows the difference between face and longitudinal
programming machining.
Longitudinal
Face
Fig. 4.79 Face, longitudinal

Operating
sequences
Situation
S A tool has been selected.
Before you define the machining type, you must first define the cutting
direction.
Face Longit.
... or ...
If there are several contour/form elements,
select the contour or form element to be machined.
You have created this finished part contour/form element using the
function Geometry (e.g. outside contour).
If there are several finished part contours/form

elements, program the turning operation for one
finished part contour/form element at a time.
Confirm your selection with the INPUT key.

The sections below describe stock removal definitions and parameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.10.7 Machining definitions
Fig. 4.80 Example “Roughing diameter”
Purpose For the stock removal operation you define:

S The position of the tool with reference to turning centre (behind,
in front)
S Machining location
– along the diameter (outside, inside)
– facing (chuck side, face side)
S Machining direction
– along the diameter (towards the spindle, away from the spindle)
– face (towards turning centre, away from turning centre)
If you have set a variable “V1367”, you can alter the interactive screen-
form input fields listed below with the function Edit program steps (see
Section 5.8.1)
S Roughing on face surface
S Roughing on diameter
S Finishing on face surface
S Finishing on diameter
S Grooving on face surface
S Grooving on diameter
S Thread on face surface
S Thread on diameter.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Notes on
programming
Roughing, Finishing, The Graphic Programming System takes the machining definitions for
Grooving the functions Roughing Finishing Grooving directly from the tool data
(e.g.: insertion location, tool edge position).
It is therefore not necessary to call up this interactive screenform while
programming the machining operation.
If the tool for the machining operation cannot be defined precisely (e.g.
button tool or two-point cutting tool), the interactive screenform appears
for defining the machining operation.
Thread cutting You define the machining for the function Thread in each programmed
machining operation.
Empirical values A variable “V1367” (see empirical value file) define whether you can
process the interactive screenform while editing the program step.
You must set this variable.
Turning: Display kinematics form when editing Copy to

0 noIF clipboard
1 yesIF
Search
Variable V1367
Selection fields
Position of tool with The programming system determines the Position of the tool with ref-
reference to turning erence to the turning centre from the tool definition (main and sec-
centre ondary cutting edge angle) and sets a “variable” parameter in the em-
pirical value file.
The following figure illustrates the definition for the variable “V1366”.
(Exception: thread cutting).
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
Tool behind turning centre (1)
V1366 = 0
ÉÉ
ÉÉ Tool in front of turning centre (2)
V1366 = 1
Fig. 4.81 Tool position

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Machining location The Machining location for face stock removal can either be the
chuck side or face side.
The Machining location for longitudinal (along the diameter) stock
removal can be outside or inside.
The definitions are shown in the figure below.
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
Fig. 4.82 Machining location
Direction of The Direction of machining for face stock removal can either be to-
machining wards the spindle or away from the spindle.
The Direction of machining for longitudinal (diameter) stock removal
can either be towards the spindle or away from the spindle.
The definitions are shown in the figure below.
(1)
(2)
Fig. 4.83 Machining direction
The corresponding cutting directions are worked out from this (marked
in Fig. 4.83 with an arrow “→”).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Operating
sequences
Situation
S You have graphically programmed a program step, e.g.: Roughing
on face plane.
S You are on programming level Machining.
S Variable “V 1367” = 1
S You wish to alter the conditions for the tool position.
Operating
sequences
Activate the vertical softkey function

Program
steps Program steps. The program steps are listed in a selection screen-
form.
Move the cursor to the required program step, e.g.: Rough turn face
outside contour.
And confirm with the INPUT key.

For example, with Roughing on face surface you can edit the follow-
ing machining definitions (see Fig. 4.84 below).
Fig. 4.84 Machining definition
Then place the cursor onto a selection field and
Open the continuation form.

The selection fields are described below.
The following section explains the stock removal parameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.8 Stock removal strategy
Fig. 4.85 Interactive screenform Stock removal parameters
Purpose The following section describes the interactive screenform Stock re-
moval parameters.
The parameters perform the following functions for stock removal:
S They can alter the cutting value parameters
S They insert DIN blocks before and after the machining operation
S They determine the approach strategy of the tool
S They define the technological parameters for the machining opera-
tion
S They determine the stock removal strategy
Notes on If you have selected functions

programming
S thread cutting and
S grooving
the Graphic Programming System recognizes the form elements.
The section below describes the individual parameters in the interactive
screenform Stock removal parameters.
Stock removal
parameters
Cutting values You entered values in the continuation form Cutting values when you
created the tool.
Selection field for

the next screenform
Cutting values
Fig. 4.86 Selection screenform “Cutting values”

You took the material of the workpiece into account when you did this.
The material of the blank determines the presetting.
Note
If you want to alter these values again, use this key to display the
continuation screenform Cutting values and make your changes to the
parameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Insertion block If required, you can add a DIN block to the programmed stock removal
before or after operation (see Section 4.13).
machining operation
This insertion block could for instance make the tool avoid an obstacle.
Selection fields
Insertion block
before/after ..
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Insertion block
Fig. 4.87 Selection fields “Insertion block ...” and example for avoiding obstacles
Approach strategy Note the selection field Approach strategy after tool change to 1st
after tool change to start point.
1st start point
Approach strategy
Z/X
ZX
X/Z
Fig. 4.88 Parameters and example of approach strategy after tool change...
You have placed the tool change point outside the workpiece contour
(e.g. Z = “100”, x = 150). You can choose one of several strategies to
arrive at the 1st initial point on the workpiece without collision.
ZX defined in the empirical values file defines the best path.
The presetting depends on the machining location.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Technological Fig. 4.89 describes the technological parameters “Machining” and the
parameters individual stock removal steps for the stock removal operation.
Contour offset by the Stock remo-

finishing allowance val depth CT
Finished part
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
contour
X
6
5
1 Infeed
4
3 2
Allowance X
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1 Infeed
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 2 Approach
3 Roughing
4 Residual
View Z corner stock
removal
(follow)
Z 5 Lift
6 Retraction
Safety clearance CLD
5
Lifting
dimen.
DV
Lifting
angle
DA
Fig. 4.89 Technological parameters for stock removal
Lifting dimension After it has reached the stock removal end position which depends on
Lifting angle the following dimension, the tool is lifted according to the values set for
lifting dimension DV and lifting angle DA (see enlargement of this
machining operation in Fig. 4.89).
Safety clearance The safety clearance CLD is the distance between the blank contour
and the tool.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Relief cutting You can enter a turning function

S with relief cutting no (1) or
S with relief cutting yes (2).
no (1)
yes (2)
Fig. 4.90 “Relief cutting” parameters

Note Please note the following special case when programming relief cutting:
Direction of machining
α
Blank contour
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Finished part
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ α
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Relief cutting
contour residual contour
Final machining α = Secondary cutting angle

of turning tool
allowance
Fig. 4.91 Relief cutting
When executing the machining operation the Graphic Programming
System takes account of the secondary cutting angle (α) of the turning
tool.
A residual contour might therefore result with relief cutting.
You must program the machining operation from the other direction to
make sure that the residual contour is machined out of the relief cut.
To do this you must limit the finished part contour in the Strategy (see
Fig. 4.92) and choose the correct machining direction.
End point
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Initial point
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Finished part
contour
Final machining allowance Residual contour
Fig. 4.92 Machining a residual corner with relief cutting

The Graphic Programming System takes account of the new blank con-
tour and infeeds correspondingly.
The programming system calculates the safety clearance CLD with re-
gard to the updated blank.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Strategy
Open continuation form Strategy to influence the stock removal strat-
egy
Fig. 4.93 Continuation screenform “Strategy”
Restrict finished part You restrict a selected finished part contour.
Contour de-
Contour de-
finition end
finition start
Fig. 4.94 Restrict finished part

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Notes on “Restrict If you have set yes (2) in the selection field Restrict finished part, the
finished part” Graphic Programming System guides you through this function.
1. Confirm the screenforms Strategy and Stock removal parameters
with the Input key.
The Graphic Programming System then asks you :
“Define limits of contour definition”
Contour de-
2. Select the function Contour definition start and limit the contour
finition start
definition by
marking the contour elements with a colour (red) using the cursor
keys + INPUT from the initial point to max. the end point.
Contour de-
3. Select the function Contour definition end and limit the contour by
finition end
marking the contour element with a colour (red) using the cursor
keys + INPUT from the end point to max. the initial point.
4. Confirm your limits you have defined (green) with the INPUT key.
The graphic procedure continues the procedure as described in Section
4.8.9 Stock removal segment.
The actual stock removal segment is then this finished part contour that
you have defined.
Red contour elements

Red contour element
End point
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Initial point
Finished
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
part contour
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ Green contour
elements
Final machining allowance Residual contour
Fig. 4.95 Machining a residual contour with relief cutting

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Following operation Here you determine the technology for the Following operation.
You can choose between
S According to param. (2)
S To cutting depth (1)
Fig. 4.96 Following operation
Stock remo-
val depth CT
Finished part contour
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6
5
1 Infeed
4
3 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1 Infeed
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 2 Approach
3 Roughing
4 Residual
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ corner stock
removal
(following
operation
Z 5 Lift
6 Retraction
Fig. 4.97 Following operation “According to param. (2)” No residual corners
Finished part contour
X
1 Infeed
4 5
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 3 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 1 Infeed
2 Approach
3 Roughing
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 4 Lift
5 Retraction
Fig. 4.98 Following operation “To cutting depth (1)” Residual corners

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
If you select selection field According to parameter (2), the Graphic

Programming System compares angle “W1” of the main cutting edge to
workpiece with angle “W” which it takes from the empirical value file.
The Graphic Programming System whether a following operation is to
be carried out from the angle between:
S main cutting edge “W1”
S contour element and
S set value “W” in “V1300” (empirical values)
If the angle (main cutting edge-contour element) is larger than the value
in “V1300”, a following operation is carried out, if smaller, a residual cor-
ner is left.
The variable “V1300” (see empirical

value file) determines the angle for
the following function.
clipboard
Conditional following: Angle between main
cutting edge and
IV1300 = 5.0ILF
Search
Main cutting edge angle

Variable W1
V1300 = angle
“W”
The result is:

W1 > W following function
W1 < W no following function

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Approach contour The displayed help graphics (Fig. 4.99) shows the different possibilities
for moving the tool to the workpiece surface.
Roughing (rough turn-
ing)
S in machining direction (SM1)
S vertical to machining direction (SM2)
S vertical to contour (SM3)
Parameter CLD = Safety clearance.
SM3
CLD
SM2
SM1
Fig. 4.99 Approaching a contour
It is thus possible to avoid obstructions (e.g. quill).

Finish cutting
(finish turning)
S in machining direction
S over arc
In machining direction
CLD
Final machining allowance
OV = 0
SSA
Over arc without OV
CLD
OV > 0
OV
SSA Over arc with OV
CLD
Fig. 4.100 Approaching contour when finish cutting

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Retraction from The Graphic Programming System offers four different methods for re-
contour tracting the tool from the workpiece surface.
Lift in rapid traverse Fig. 4.101 below displays the function SM1. The Graphic Programming
w/o travelling back System creates a DIN code in the part program which lifts the tool in
(SM1) rapid traverse without travelling back.
SM1
Z
X
G00
G01
Fig. 4.101 Lift in rapid traverse without travelling back (SM1)
Lift at feedrate w/o Fig. 4.102 below displays the function SM2. The Graphic Programming
travelling back (SM2) System creates a DIN code in the part program which lifts the tool at
feedrate without travelling back.
SM2
Z
X
G01
Fig. 4.102 Lift at feedrate without travelling back (SM2)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Lift in rapid traverse Fig. 4.103 below displays the function SM3. The Graphic Programming
and travel back (SM3) System creates a DIN code in the part program which lifts the tool in
rapid traverse and travels back.
X
CLD
SM3
Z
X
G00
G01
Fig. 4.103 Lift in rapid traverse and travel back (SM3)
Lift at feedrate and Fig. 4.104 below displays the function SM4. The Graphic Programming
travel back (SM4) System creates a DIN code in the part program which lifts the tool at
feedrate and travels back.
X
CLD
SM4
G00
G01
Fig. 4.104 Lift at feedrate and travel back (SM4)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Lift without travelling Fig 4.105 below displays the function SM5. The Graphic Programming
back (SM5) System creates a DIN code in the part program which lifts the tool with-
out travelling back.
SM5
G00
G01
Fig. 4.105 Lift without travelling back (SM5)
Notes on lifting
The figure on the left is an enlargement of the machining step 5 in

Lifting5 Fig. 4.89.
dimens.
DV
After the stock removal end position which is dependent on the follow-
ing function dimension has been reached, the tool is lifted according to
Lifting the predefined values for lifting dimension DV and lifting angle DA.
angle
DA

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Operating
sequences
Situation
S The workholder is in position.
S A tool has been selected
S A cutting direction as well as a finished part contour has been se-
lected.
S The position of the tool, the machining location and machining direc-
tion has been preset by the Graphic Programming System.
Procedure If you have several contours/form elements,
select the relevant one with the cursor keys and
press the INPUT key.

The programming system now displays the interactive screenform stock
removal parameters.
1. Enter the required parameters in the input field or select the relevant
settings for the strategy.
2. Confirm the entered values with the INPUT key.
Note The interactive screenform Stock removal parameters now displayed
contains default values from the empirical value file.
Fig. 4.106 Stock removal parameters
You can overwrite the default parameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
The information given in the information line below the graphic field
helps you to program the machining operation.
You define the type of tool when you program the tool geometry.
One type of information might be:
“Machining is carried out with the secondary cutting edge”.
Secondary cutting The programming system takes this information from the tool data and
edge tool geometry.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ +X
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
+ –
HSW
ÎÎ ÎÎ
HSW
ÎÎ
LS
SW Secondary cutting edge
CMA
ÎÎ +Z
CMI
# 278
Fig. 4.107 Secondary cutting edge
You terminate you entries in the screenform Stock removal parame-

ters with the INPUT key.
The next section describes how you select the segment for the stock
removal operation.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.9 Stock removal segment
Fig. 4.108 Interactive screenform Stock removal segment: Beginning
Fig. 4.109 Interactive screenform Stock removal segment: End
Purpose The following section describes the interactive screenforms Stock

removal segment Beginning and End.
With the information that it is given about the
S blank
S finished part
the Graphic Programming System calculates
S the stock removal surface for the function Roughing (rough turning)
and
S the path of the copy turning tool for the function Finish cut (finish
turning)
You define
S the offset value
S the offset direction
S the initial and end angle
for the initial and end point.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Notes on
programming
Limitation point The following description of the start and end point of the contour to be
characteristics machined is an example for the function Roughing (rough turning).
Machining direction
X End
point
Infeed
direction
Initial
point
Fig. 4.110 Finished part contour
The Graphic Programming System extracts the tool nose radius from
the tool data.
Z
Tool nose radius
centre path
Fig. 4.111 Tool nose radius
In the following figures the tool nose is represented by a circle. The

radius of the circle corresponds to the tool nose radius.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Offset value OV With the parameter Offset value OV you can define numerically by how
much the initial or end point can be offset from the selected start or end
point.
The offset value OV is calculated as follows:
OV = Factor (from empirical value file)
r (tool nose radius)
The default for OV is “1”.
The following table explains the offset value OV:
Approach Retraction
OVu0
SEA=90°
SSA
OV tangential
OV tangential OV in cutting
SSA=0 direction
OV in cutting CLD
direction CLD
OV=0
SEA=90°
SSA
SSA=0
CLD CLD
OVt0
SSA
SSA=0
SEA=90°
OV tangential
OV tangential
OV in cutting
OV in cutting direction
CLD CLD
direction

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Offset direction You can increase the traversing movement of the tool
S in the cutting direction or
S tangential to the contour
by defining an offset.
Initial angle SSA The initial and end angles describe how the stock removal operation
End angle SEA from the initial or end point to the blank is to be concluded. The result is
the stock removal range.
Fig. 4.112 below displays an initial point on a straight line with positive
offset and two different angles for SSA.
The start point for machining is positioned in each case at a safety
clearance CLD outside of the dashed blank.
Offset value
Offset direction
Direction of motion
SSA
OV tangential
SSA=0
CLD
OV in
cutting direction
Fig. 4.112 Offset value OV with offset direction tangential or in cutting direction to the
contour
Fig. 4.113 displays an end point on a straight line with positive offset
and two different angles for SEA.
The end point of machining is positioned in each case at a safety clear-
ance CLD outside of the dashed blank.
Offset value
Offset direction
Direction of motion
SEA=90°
OV tangential
OV in
cutting direction
CLD
Fig. 4.113 Offset value OV with offset direction tangential and in cutting direction to the
contour

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Error during program- Fig. 4.114 displays an example of incorrect initial point selection. The
ming of the initial contour is incorrect because to the tangential offset which is opposite to
point (start point) the direction of motion.
Direction of motion
Initial point
SEA
SEA=0
OV in
cutting direction
CLD
Fig. 4.114 Initial point leads to collision
Fig. 4.115 displays the correct initial point selection in this situation.
Direction of motion
Initial point
SEA SEA=0
OV in
cutting direction
CLD
Fig. 4.115 Initial point is correct

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Operating
sequences
Situation
S The workholder is in position.
S A tool has been selected.
S Cutting direction and finished part contour have been selected.
S The position of the tool, the machining location and machining direc-
tion have been defined.
S Stock removal strategy has been defined.
This section describes how you define a viewport for the stock removal
operation for your selected turning function.
The system suggests the whole area possible with the tool that you
have chosen.
However, you can limit the stock removal segment as much as you
want by defining:
S an initial point and
S end point on the finished part contour.
You set the stock removal limitation points as described below.
At a later stage the system will calculate the cut segmentation for the
stock removal segment from the available blank to the finished part.
The system then displays its calculated suggestion.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
General information
on key functions
You can limit the stock removal segment in two ways:
1st possibility
Press one of these softkeys,
Init. point
[ H ]
End point
[ D ]
then move the initial point or end point along

contour element by element using the cursor keys.
2nd possibility
Init. point Operate these functions, then

[ –{– ]
End point
[– { –]
then use the operator control crosshair to select, e.g., the initial point
of a turning operation on a contour.
Note:
You must touch the contour.
You end your selection with the INPUT key.
You set the parameters for the approach and retract movements
required for the stock removal operation in the interactive screenform
Stock removal segment:... (described below) now displayed and then
close it with the INPUT key.
If you do not agree with the stock removal suggestion made by the
system, start again.
Press the INPUT key to end stock removal segment selection.
You then leave this programming level.
Pressing the RECALL key aborts the whole function.
If the Graphic Programming System recognizes that

there will be a collision, the cursor remains on the
displayed interactive screenform.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.10.10 Grooving technology
4.10.10Grooving technology
Grooving
Purpose With the function Grooving, it is possible to create

S a standard groove/recess
S a thread undercut
S contour grooving (available soon) or
S cutoff.
Notes on
programming
Standard When a grooving operation is defined, the contour element for the func-
groove tions
S standard groove/recess
Thread
undercut S thread undercut and
S cutoff
Cutoff
must be defined as recess under the function Form elements when
creating the geometry.
If the recessing tool displays the dimensions of the recess width, a
“single recess” is made with Standard recess.
Finish grooving or If you have set the empirical values

rough finish grooving
S V1365 (rough grooving) or
S V1394 (finish grooving)
with “contour output” (see also Fig. 4.116 “Tool offset parameters” on
the next page), the set tool width of the grooving tool must correspond
to the offset difference of the two tool edges in the TOA memory of the
NC).
Otherwise a compensating movement at the base of the recess (danger
of tool breakage) will take place.
TOA data for The TOA memory of the NC provides two D compensation memory
grooving locations for the grooving tools. The Graphic Programming System re-
quires the parameters for the width of the cutting tip and the longitudinal
and cross dimension of the grooving tool to be entered for these com-
pensation values.
If a TOA file is generated by means of the Generate TO file function,
the system moves the compensation values for the two deviations in a
TOA file. The sketch below illustrates the parameters in an example of
Recessing tool longitudinal.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
F
Tool
Longitudinal L radius
r
dimension
ÎÎ L
ÎÎÎÎ
Q
ÎÎÎÎ
Cutting
tip Theoretical
+ tool tip P
X
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
P
BSP
Q–BSP
Width 2nd dimension in compensation memory
ÎÎ Q
Cross
dimension 1st dimension in compensation memory
+
Z
Fig. 4.116 Parameters for recessing tool longitudinal
If, for example, the width of the recessing tool = 5mm and the cross di-
mension = 30mm, the system enters the following values in the com-
pensation memory when generating the TOA file:
S D1: ... P3=30mm ;“Q” and
S D2: ... P3=25mm ;“Q” minus “BSP”.
Notes on The following parameters determine the machining strategy for a cut-
cutoff off operation:
Fig. 4.117 Interactive screenform for the function cutoff
Retraction factor RFF This factor determines the value for the retraction feed.
The Graphic Programming System enters the following feed value as
the retraction feed:
S factor=0, rapid traverse
S factor>0, factor RFF x infeed feed F1

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Value for feed The following parameters apply for reducing the feed:
reduction
F1
F1–(1RV) Retraction feed

= RFFF1
DI F1–(2RV)
F1–(nRV)
RV
Z
F1–(nRV)=RV
Diameter DR = defined diameter (mm)
increment (mm) Infeed feed
minus
feed reduction
Reduced
feed
(rev/min)
Fig. 4.118 Parameters for feed reduction
The machine slows down the feed with every increment DI until the
feed reduction value has been reached.
S ! This does not have to be the cutoff diameter !
The number “n” steps for reducing the feed is derived from:
S n = Infeed feed F1/ value for the feed reduction
Starting the The feed reduction starts from the defined diameter DR.
feed reduction at
diameter DR
Increment DI After each increment (DI = radius value in mm) the Graphic Program-
ming System calculates a new value for the infeed feed.
The system subtracts the value for the feed reduction from the current
feed step by step (increment by increment n) until:
Infeed feedreduced = Value for feed reduction
Programming Retraction factor for feed RFF=2
example Feed reduction from diameter DR=90 mm
with diameter increment DI=5 mm
Value of feed reduction =0.1rev/mm
Infeed feed F1=0.8rev/mm
%MPF1
.
.
.
N40 G00 D12 X104 F0.8 ;Infeed feed F1
N45 Z–50

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
N50 G01 X90 F0.7 ;Feed reduction

N80 G01 X20 F0.1 ;Cutoff diameter
N90 G04 S1
N95 G01 X104 F1,6 ;Retraction feed RFFF1
N100
.
.
Error messages During grooving a validity check takes place with the following error
messages:
Error message Explanation Remedy
Tool too wide for re- You have chosen a tool that
cess..QUIT” is too wide or a wall allow-
ance that is too large.
“Caution: Possible contour The system is pointing to If this WOP error message
violation by TRC ... QUIT” possible errors in the Tool appears, a contour violation
Radius Compensation in the might occur.
NC with this error message. If the NC displays the error
message
“3021 contour violation
with TRC”
and the machine continues to
process the program (ma-
chine data) a contour viola-
tion will occur.
Check whether the wall al-
lowance is too large,
whether the lifting dimen-
sion is too small or the tool is
unsuitable.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
4.10.11 Contour grooving
4.10.11Contour grooving
.
Grooving
Contour With the function Contour grooving, definition of the machining opera-
grooving tion is made by selection of the finished part to be machined.
With the function Contour grooving it is possible to graphically ma-
chine asymmetric recesses for longitudinal or face machining on any
straight finished-part contour elements.
Both outside and inside grooves are possible.
The finished part contour for the asymmetric groove is programmed
with the function Oriented geometry.
Fig. 4.119 below displays two examples of longitudinal and face ma-
chining.
X
X
Longitudinal
Face
Z Z
Fig. 4.119 Groove for longitudinal and face machining
Notes on The Graphic Programming System calculates the movement range for
programming the recessing tool along the contour selected.
On the basis of the entered rough cutting depth, the system calculates
a new stock removal for each depth.
Safety clearance The safety clearance CLD is responsible of retraction from the contour.
CLD
The stock removal direction is along the contour curve towards the
Rough cutting depth
rough cutting depth (with Form elements recess, the stock removal
CT
direction is up to the groove base).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Fig. 4.120 displays the movement of the recessing tool with the function
Contour grooving/rough grooving.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Safety Machining
X ÎÎÎÎ
clearance
CLD
direction
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Rough
cutting
ÎÎÎ
depth
CT
Minimum
overlap
MO
Form elements
recess
Recess base
Fig. 4.120 Schematic of stock removal steps with Contour grooving or single recess
Operating The operating sequence with the function Contour grooving is as de-
sequences scribed in the User’s Guide “Part 2: Operator/Programming Functions”
in the Sections
S “Operating sequences for the turning function”
S “Stock removal strategy”
S “Stock removal segment”
They also define
S the stock removal strategy and
S delimit the stock removal segment with initial and end point.
If you establish limits for the stock removal segment, you position the
initial or end point on the contour elements for the free recess accord-
ing to the machining direction.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Fig. 4.121 below displays two examples of on asymmetric groove. The

segment of the finished part contour to be cut has limits set by the ini-
tial and end points.
Machining
Machining direction
direction
Initial Initial End

point point point
End
point
Fig. 4.121 Stock removal segment for free recess
The start point for the function Contour grooving is defined in accor-
dance with the machining direction (kinematics screenform).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.12 Thread cutting
4.10.12Thread cutting
Thread
cutting
Purpose You can turn both a longitudinal thread and a transversal thread with
the function Thread cutting.
Notes on The basic thread data are entered in the interactive screenform Stock
programming removal parameters (see Fig. 4.122).
Fig. 4.122 Interactive screen form Stock removal parameters for thread cutting
The Graphic Programming System calculates the default for the num-
ber of cuts NT from:
Number of cuts NT = maximum thread depth TD divided by 25%
Factor from empirical values file of maximum cut depth ???
Enter the manual cut segmentation in a following screenform
(see Fig. 4.123).
Fig. 4.123 Interactive screen form Cut segmentation
The parameters for thread run-in AD and thread run-out OD (see

Fig. 4.124) are calculated as follows:
Thread AD = Factor AD from the empirical values file
thread pitch P

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
If a form element thread undercut follows, then:

thread run-out OD = 1/2 undercut length
If no form element thread undercut follows, then:
thread cut-out OD = factor OD from the empirical value file
thread pitch P
Fig. 4.124 Interactive screenform Stock removal parameters for thread cutting
Error messages:
If the error message
“No feedrate programmed”
is displayed during thread cutting and you want to program with fee-
drate during infeed (see Fig. 4.125), a feed > 0 must be defined for
the tool concerned.
Fig. 4.125 Parameter infeed
Default for the infeed movement is Rapid traverse.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Error message Explanation Remedy
“Wrong cutting values You have pro- The parameter

– constant cutting grammed constant constant cutting
speed ?” cutting speed. speed can be
programmed when
and the tool is being
generated and when
“Machining not pos- the machining
sible .... QUIT” operation is being
programmed.
In both cases it is the
interactive screenform
Cutting values.
Both parameters
should be changed as
machining is not
possible.
You should:
S change the selec-
tion field Constant
cutting speed to
cutting speed
(screenform
Cutting values) or
S program a differ-
ent speed.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
11.95
4.10.13 Drilling functions
4.10.13Drilling functions
Drill
concentric
Purpose The Graphic Programming System centres the drill to the centre of the
workpiece for all drilling functions.
Notes on The programming system recognizes the blank contour and allows for
programming the insert length.
The finished part contour is not violated.
Where two-stage tools are used (Countersink function), the system
takes account of the drilling depth as a function of the diameter.
Fig. 4.126 Drilling technology
Incl. length of tip in

calc. parameter
S No (1) – Drilling depth identical with parameterized value
S Yes (2) – Adds length of tip to computed drilling depth
Input drill depth
parameter
S Direct
0 – Drilling up to intersection point taking into account the
finished part or boring through or drilling until reaching
insertion length of drill.
> 0 – Incremental depth specification from STP start point
S Via chamfer diameter
These parameters are valid for the functions Drill/center and
Counterbore. The drilling depth is calculated from the STP
start point depending on the cutting edge angle and the
chamfer diameter entered.
S End plane
The effect of the entered value depends on its sign and it de-
fines the absolute end position of the drill.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.10.13 Drilling functions
Procedure
1. Load a magazine with the required drilling tool using the function
Load magazine.
2. Go into the programming level Machining/drilling.
Deep hole 3. Select a drilling technology, e.g. Deep hole.
Tool
selection 4. Select a tool if necessary for the machining operation.
The Graphic Programming System automatically centers the drill to
the centre of the workpiece.
Value
5. Activate the drilling function with the Value input softkey when you
input
have selected the drill.
6. Enter the parameters in an interactive screenform, e.g. Deep hole
drilling.
Note Graphic help is given for every parameter.
7. Once you have entered the parameters and the approach and re-
tract strategy, confirm them with the INPUT key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
11.95
4.10.14 Collision check
4.10.14Collision check
Purpose When the Graphic Programming System calculates the traversing mo-
tions of the tool, it performs a collision check.
Programming
notes
The collision check is performed for traversing
motions in the turning plane (for example roughing).
Empirical values You can influence the collision evaluation via variables in the empirical
value file.
Collision check The system checks the workholders and the blank against
S the geometry of the cutting tip of the tool or
S the geometry of the complete tool including tool holder or
S it switches off collision check.
The “V1432” variable from the empirical value file influences this check.
“V1432” = 0 – without monitoring
= 1 – with complete tool
= 2 – with tool cutting tip
Representation of If the tool collides with the blank or workholder, a flashing tool is dis-
collision at end point played in the graphics area (see Fig. 4.128).
of programmed tra-
A collision point is marked by a circle.
versing motion
Machining
Views
Screen
Collision
Collision in traversing range of tool ...
Fig. 4.128 Collision between tool and blank at end point

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
11.94
Fig. 4.129 below shows an enlarged display of the collision portrayed

in Fig. 4.128.
Machining
Views
Screen
Collision
Fig. 4.129 Enlarged display of collision shown in Fig. 4.128
If a collision occurs during traversing motion, the possible positions of

the tool blink in the graphics area (see Fig. 4.130).
This system uses circles to identify the damaged part.
Machining
Tool position
Refresh
Select
viewport
Set
viewport
Collision Move
viewport
Enter
viewport
Fig. 4.130 Tool-workholder collision during traversing motion

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
11.95
Protection zone You use the “V1433” variable to define the protection zone against colli-
sion in millimeters around the blank and the workholder.
The figures below illustrate this parameter:
Machining
Views
Protection zone
Screen
Collision
Programm
Stock removal in protected range steps
Fig. 4.131 Protection zone around workholder and blank with possible collision in the case
of wrong parameterization during retraction (for example offset value)
In Fig. 4.132 below, the thread depth is within the protection zone.
Machining
Refresh
Select
viewport
Protection zone
Set
viewport
Move
viewport
Enter
Collision viewport
Fig. 4.132 Protection zone for thread and one possible collision

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
11.94
Collision check, If you use a tap or a reamer for concentric drilling, no check is made
exceptions for the core diameter.
Operating se-
quences
The OK softkey resumes the calculation of the traversing motion until
ok the next collision, etc.
When the OK softkey function is activated,

the Graphic Programming System generates a DIN
code with traversing paths which might cause a
collision.
The RECALL key aborts the calculation of the traversing motion.
When the RECALL key is pressed,

S the system deletes the machining operation
completely if you have just created it
S nothing is deleted if you have worked under the
Program steps function. You can correct the ma-
chining operation under Edit program step.
Notes on Program If you use the OK softkey to acknowledge one or more collisions and
steps function subsequently program other machining operations (for example drilling),
please note the following:
The system displays the collisions each time it calculates the machining
operation.
If you do not use the OK but the RECALL key for acknowledging the
collision, the Program steps function cannot be used for selecting the
subsequent steps.
You cannot execute the subsequent steps until you have corrected the
machining step.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.11 End face/peripheral surface machining
Machining
You have selected an end face or peripheral

surface as the active surface.
Purpose You use the Machining softkey function when you

S machine with the technologies drilling/milling.
Notes on You machine standard contours or user-defined contours with 2 1/2 D

programming milling or drilling.
Tool magazine You use a tool magazine for machining a workpiece in different ways.
The tool magazine can either be a user magazine (see Section 4.6,
Page 4–51) or a master data magazine.
Fig. 4.133 Interactive screenform Magazine
In the interactive screenform Magazine that appears on the screen you

either select tool master data or user magazine.
Note User magazines already contain the correct T and D values.
If you are using the tool master data, add the required values for maga-
zine position T and tool offsets D in the screenform General tool data.
If tools are missing in an existing magazine, you can alter or add to the
contents at any time in programming level Tools Material / Masterdata
magazine.
The loaded magazine can be replaced by another with the function Edit
program step (see Section 4.16.2, Page 4–208).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Interactive screen- Some of the parameters in the interactive screenforms have default val-
forms ues. The programming system obtains these values from an empirical
values file (see Section 4.2).
Select the contours or holes to be machined with the selection control.
This section provides you with programming information for:
S Milling technology
S Drilling technology
S Programming the cycles
S Programming the insert blocks
S Simulation
4.11.1 Milling technology
Milling
Purpose Various types of machining are available to you here:

S contour milling
S solid milling
S manual milling
S surface milling
Notes on
programming
Contour milling You machine selected contours with cutter radius compensation (CRC)
if this is required.
Solid milling You machine selected pockets with islands.
The programming system computes the paths without cutter radius
compensation (CRC).
If the selected pocket contains islands that must be

considered, these must be selected additionally.
Pockets with different end planes cannot be
machined in one working step.
Islands with different start planes can be machined
together. In this case it is possible to choose
whether or not to include the start plane in the
machining process.
Holes or cycle reference points that have already been programmed

can be selected as plunge points.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.11.1 Milling technology
Manual milling The cutting operations for a pocket follow a specific strategy. You guide
the tool centre path either by means of the crosshair or by entering
coordinates.
Surface milling You machine the surface of a selected contour. The pockets can also
be machined. The programming system computes the paths parallel to
the contour.
Start point for You can define a start point for machining closed contours or sections
contour milling of contours.
Machine contour You define an initial and/or end element for a contour section.
section for Individual sections cannot be machined from geometries that you have
contour milling created under the function Standard geometry.
Operating
sequences
1. Go into the programming level Machining/milling.
2. Select a tool.
3. Select a type of machining.
4.11.2 Contour milling
Contour
milling
CZ/X
Fig. 4.134 Contour milling
Purpose You have created the various contours under the function Geometry in
the following programming modes:
S Standard geometry
S Oriented geometry
S Construction geometry
If you have used the Standard geometry function to create the con-
tour, the Graphic Programming System considers the contour to be
closed.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
If you have used the Construction geometry or Oriented geometry

function to create the contour, the Graphic Programming System con-
siders the contour to consist of individual geometry elements.
The text below describes the Contour milling interactive screenform.
The parameters in this interactive screenform have the following signifi-
cance for the Contour milling function:
S You can change the cutting value parameters.
S You insert DIN blocks before and after the machining operation.
S You specify the approach/retract strategy to/from the workpiece con-
tour for the tool.
S You define the technological parameters for machining.
Notes on
programming
Standard geometry The programming system computes the paths for a closed contour. You
can define the start point by means of the crosshair.
Oriented geometry The user can decide whether the programming system computes
and construction
S closed contours,
geometry
S open contours, or the
S contour sections (elements).
Start point standard As a standard function, the programming system stores start points for
the beginning of the contour. Unless you have specified differently, the
system begins to process the contour at this point.
The Graphic Programming System detects whether you have used the
Standard geometry function or individual elements (Oriented geome-
try) to program the contour.
Depending on the programmed geometries the system suggests the
start point for the machining operation.
Start points
Geometry standard
Circle 0_
Rectangle Left bottom
n-corner (without angle) Left bottom
Elongated hole Left
Rectangular groove Left bottom
Annular groove 0_
n-corner groove Left bottom
Radial groove 0_
Circumferencial groove 0_
Oriented geometry Initial point (defined manually)
Construction geometry Start point (defined manually)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Contour direction In Oriented geometry and Construction geometry the contour follows
the direction in which you have constructed it.
In the Standard geometry the contour traces a path to the left (coun-
terclockwise).
Simulation In simulation for contour milling, the Graphic Programming System
makes no allowance for switching on/off the cutter radius compensa-
tion.
Contour milling in- The text below describes the individual parameters.
teractive screenform
Cutting values You have filled in the Cutting values screenform when creating the tool
(see Page 4-58).
Selection field for

S
Cutting values
Fig. 4.135 “Cutting values” selection field
You have taken into account the material for the workpiece.
The default value depends on the material.
If you want to change these values, press this key to insert the screen-
form Cutting values and edit the parameters (see also Page 4–66 in
Section 4.7.2 !).
These changes of the cutting values apply only to

the machining step currently programmed.
If you want to use the values always, you have to
edit the data in the magazine and save it under the
Tools materials function.
Insertion block before You can add a DIN block to the milling operation programmed if re-
or after machining quired (see Page 4–195).
The insertion block can be, for example, a comment.
S Selection fields Insertion

block before/after ...
Fig. 4.136 Selection fields “Insertion block ...”

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Approach/retract stra- You define the approach strategy to the 1st start point after tool change
tegy to 1st start point or the last machining operation of your tool. The following settings are
after tool change possible:
S C/ZX (traversing path – – – in Fig. 4.137)

S X/CZ (traversing path ––– in Fig. 4.137)
S CZX (traversing path – . – . – in Fig. 4.137)
S CZ (positioning in the plane).
The figure below illustrates the possible approaches to the 1st start
point.
S
Approach/retract
strategy to 1st start
CZ/X point
Tool change
point
CZ
X
C X
CZX
X
CT
CZ First start
point
Fig. 4.137 Parameters and example for approach strategy after tool change ...
Default CZ/X is stored in the empirical value file.

Safety distance CT The Safety distance CT is the distance between the finished part con-
tour and the tool.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Distances for ap- Fig. 4.138 below illustrates in detail the various possible ways of ap-
proach/retract proaching the first start point up to the start plane PS. The system
takes into account either
S the withdrawal distance CR (from retract strategy) or
S the safety distance CT (from approach strategy) or
S the approach distance DS or
S the safety plane SP.
CZ/X
= Traversing path of
milling tool
SP DS
CR
X
CT
CT
PS
W Z
Fig. 4.138 Parameters and example for the various distances
Notes on parameters The approach distance DS and the safety plane SP can be edited in the
CR, CT, DS and SP contour milling interactive screenform.
The approach distance DS should be greater than / equal to the safety
distance CT.
The safety distance CT is edited in the Approach contour interactive
screenform (see Fig. 4.139, Page 4-162)
and the withdrawal distance CR is edited in the Retract from contour
interactive screenform (see Fig. 4.142, Page 4–173).
No data are entered in the input field if “###.###” is displayed.
After the first start point the milling tool always

travels to safety distance CT in order to avoid
exceeding the number of NC blocks in the part
program.
With “centre” milling the system always takes into
account the approach distance DS and the safety
plane SP.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Approach contour Fig. 4.139 below illustrates the parameters of the Approach contour
screen form and the possible ways of approaching the contour.
CZ/X
SM1 AD SM2
AD
SM3
SM4
AD
AD
AR
AD
SM5 SM6
AD
AR AR
Fig. 4.139 Approach contour
The approach distance AD is the approach line to, for example, a quad-
rant.
In the Approach contour interactive screenform you edit the safety
clearance CT (see Fig. 4.138, Page 4–170).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Lower You can either

S lower before approaching or
S lower after approaching.
The figures below illustrate these strategies:
(1)
C
(2)
(3)
Z
W
Fig. 4.140 Lowering before approach
C (3) (1)
(2)
Z
W
Fig. 4.141 Lowering after approach
Cutter radius compensation (CRC) is active with

“outside, inside or centre” contour milling.
You have to make sure that the milling tool does not
collide with the workpiece when approaching and
lowering.
CRC on You can influence the approach strategy in the following ways:
S CRC ON during approach position (marked with (1) in Fig. 4.140
and 4.141)
S CRC ON during lowering (marked with (2) in Fig. 4.140 and 4.141)
S CRC ON during approach (marked with (3) in Fig. 4.140 and 4.141)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Retract from contour Fig. 4.142 below illustrates the parameters of the Retract from contour
interactive screenform and the possible retract strategies.
CZ/X
EM1 DD EM2
DD
EM3 DD EM4
DD
DR
DD
EM5
DR
Fig. 4.142 Retract from contour
In the Retract from contour interactive screenform you edit the retract
clearance CR (see also Fig. 4.138, Page 4–170).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Technology parame- Fig. 4.143 illustrates the technology parameters of the contour milling
ters interactive screenform.
= Traversing path
of milling tool
CT = Safety distance
SP = Safety plane
SP
X
CT AC
PS
AB PE
W Z
Fig. 4.143 Technology parameters for contour milling
Start plane PS, Start and end plane of a machining operation always refer to the vol-
end plane PE ume selected.
You set the parameters for start plane and end plane when creating
the geometry. The Graphic Programming System enters these parame-
ters into the input fields.
With different start and end planes, the default in the input fields de-
pends on the highest start and end planes.
Machining operation 1 Machining operation 2
X Start plane 1 Start plane 2

SP
End plane 1 End plane 2
CT
W Z
CT
–X = Traversing path CT = Safety distance

of milling tool SP = Safety plane
Fig. 4.144 Start and end plane
Infeed depth IF The default for infeed is derived from the maximum tool cutting depth.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Tool position In the Tool position selection field you are offered the following posi-
tions of the milling tool:
S centre (on)
S left (le)
S right (re)
S inside (in)
S outside (ou)
Fig. 4.145 below illustrates these parameters.
centre (on) left (li) right (re)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
inside (in) outside (ou)
Fig. 4.145 Tool position
Tool positions left (le) or right (re) can be selected

for individual elements.
Tool positions inside (in) or outside (ou) can be
selected for closed contours.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Path milling strategy The figure below illustrates in detail the parameters in the Path milling
(contour milling) strategy interactive screenform.
CZ/X
Machining Infeed
direction
X Maximum Uniform
IF IF
In Against Z
direction direction W
of contour of contour
Machining Narrow
point offset
To Bidirectional Unidirectional
Fro
No
Yes
Fig. 4.146 Path milling strategy (contour milling)
Notes on Narrow If the milling tool is greater than the narrow point and you have selected
point offset OV pa- Narrow point offset No, the Graphic Programming System issues an
rameter error message.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Operating
sequences
1. Go into the programming level
Machining/Milling/Contour milling.
2. Select the contour.
3. You can define a start point.
4. For individual contour elements, you define the initial and end ele-
ments.
5. Enter parameters in the interactive screenform Contour milling.
Programming hints You will now learn how to graphically program the machining of the
on Contour milling closed contour or of individual contour sections with the Contour mill-
ing type of machining.
To make it easier to trace the direction of the contour, you can switch
Repre-
on the direction arrows. To do this, press the vertical softkey Represen-
sentation
tation/Direction arrows on/off.
Dir. arrows
on/off
A tool is required for machining. You select a tool and
Tool
selection
Contour activate the function Contour milling.

milling
Fig. 4.147 Information line, contour milling
Information line The information line below the graphics area guides you when program-
ming.
You select a contour.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
Start If you do not use the start point given by the programming system then
point define the Start point of the tool with this key.
Select the start point for the X/Y coordinates manually with the cross-
hair.
The system takes the Z coordinate from the programmed contour pa-
rameters.
The INPUT key sets the start point selected with the crosshair and
ends contour selection.
Note The programming system identifies the contour element that is closest
to the setpoint.
CZ/X
Fig. 4.148 Contour milling
You are offered graphic help for every parameter.

In the interactive screenform Contour milling the parameters have de-
faults taken from the empirical values file.
You can overwrite all parameters.
... ... ...
Finally, confirm the parameters that have been entered. The Graphic
Programming System computes and displays the travel paths.
Contour milling of Contours whose geometry you have created under the functions Ori-
part contours ented geometry or Construction geometry can be broken down into
individual contour elements. You then process these contour elements
separately from the complete contour. Various hints on programming
are given below.
You have selected a tool and activated the function Contour milling.
You are requested to select a contour. You have generated the geome-
try of the contour under Construction geometry or Oriented geome-
try and you have defined the start point yourself.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Note The programming system considers the trace of the contour starting
from the start point of the geometry.
Red elements Elements shown in red are elements that are machined in contour mill-
ing.
Blue elements Elements of the geometry shown in blue are elements which are not
machined with contour milling.
Initial End
element element
With the functions Initial element or End element you define the con-
tour elements that you are machining.
You select contour elements with the crosshair.
With the INPUT key you confirm the selection
and on pressing the INPUT key again you end element selection.
In the interactive screen form Contour milling you parameterize the

machining operation and
confirm the parameters.

The programming system computes and displays the travel paths for
the Contour milling type of machining.
Note:
Note If the programming system displays the milling traversing movements
on the wrong side of the contour, change the sign in the Radius input
field.
Sequence of operation:
1. Open interactive screenform Mill contour.
2. Open continuation screenform Approach strategy.
3. Make changes in input field Radius.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.11.3 Surface milling
Surface
milling
Purpose You machine the surface of a selected contour, selected islands or se-
lected blank.
Notes on
programming
The tool travels over the selected contours by a cutter path overlap
amount.
The programming system computes the paths parallel to the contour.
Machining always takes place from the outside to the inside.
The values for the approach distance are taken from the programming
system from the empirical values file. The empirical value ensures cor-
rect infeed of the cutter.
Cutter path overlap
Fig. 4.149 Cutter path overlap
Operating
sequences
The surface area shown in the diagram above will be surface milled as
the next example.
Before beginning with the Surface milling function, you must include a
face mill in the tool magazine Exercise.
1. Go into the programming plane
Machining/Milling/Surface milling.
2. Select the contour.
3. Enter parameters in the interactive screenform Surface milling.
Notes
Select the required tool, the face mill, for surface milling.
Tool
selection

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Having chosen the cutter, activate the milling function Surface milling
Surface and select the blank contour.
milling
The interactive screenform Surface milling appears with the default

parameters from the empirical values file.
CZ/X
Fig. 4.150 Surface milling: interactive screenform
You are offered graphic help for each parameter.
You enter the parameters as well as the approach and retraction strat-
egy and accept by pressing the INPUT key.
Note You can follow the machining operation (approach and retraction strat-
egy) on the screen by means of the
Machining simulation function.
The system computes the cutter paths parallel to the contour. You can
see that the blank contour has been overlapped at the edge with the
cutter path overlap of 30%. As a result, the corners of very acute
angled contours may not be completely machined.
Remachining is possible with the Manual milling function.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
4.11.4 Manual milling

Manual
milling
Purpose You remove stock (machine) according to your own strategy.

You define
1. the approach and retract strategy in the manual milling interactive
screenform (see Fig. 4.151) and
2. the motions of the cutter.
The Graphic Programming System uses the default parameters in the
manual milling interactive screenform and the first point entered to
generate the blocks for approach and retract in the DIN part program.
If you wish to define approach and retract yourself, you have to set the
parameters in the manual milling interactive screenform to ZERO (“0”).
You can use the following manual functions for defining machining:
S feed
S rapid traverse
S numeric input
S the crosshair.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Notes on You are in the menu tree Machining/Milling.

programming
Select a tool, and
Tool
selection
press the softkey Manual milling.

Manual
milling
CZ/X
Fig. 4.151 Manual milling
You parameterize the machining operation in the interactive screenform

Manual milling.
Comments on the
input fields
Default parameters The default parameters affect the machining strategy and must if nec-
essary be set to ZERO (“0”).
Cutting values You make entries in the interactive screenform for cutting values by
opening a continuation screenform in the
input field “Cutting values”.
With the INPUT key you confirm the parameters for the cutting values.
Total depth = 0, The programming system positions the tool to the points specified
Infeed = 0 manually.
You can move the tool in three dimensions.
You machine the stock down to the end plane in accordance with your
own strategy.
Total depth > 0, You specify a Total depth and the value for the various Infeeds.
Infeed > 0
The traversing movements that you have entered manually for the first
plane are shifted by the programming system for each infeed until the
end plane is reached.
Note Numerically entered positional values can be traversed either at rapid
traverse rate or at feedrate.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
If you enter a depth infeed, the Graphic

Programming System performs this motion at rapid
traverse rate (applies only for manual milling).
Comments You describe the machining operations. This text appears as a com-
ment in the work schedule.
Having accepted the parameters, enter manually the traversing move-
ments of the cutter.
Peripheral
surface
Fig. 4.152 Manual milling
Abort OK
The function Abort cancels the entire operation.

The function OK accepts the graphically programmed operations.
Rapid
Feed
traverse
The traversing conditions of the tool are set by means of the functions
Feed and Rapid traverse.
This key erases the last manual traversing movement.
Undo
You specify any positions that you require as well as the reference
Numeric plane for the depth by means of the Numeric input softkey.
input

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Start and machining There are two possibilities for inputting the start coordinates, namely:
coordinates Z, C, X
1st possibility
Numeric You specify the start and machining coordinates (Z, C, X) directly.
input
2nd possibility
You control the Z/C start position with the crosshair.
The Graphic Programming System makes up the X value from the

value specified under Numeric input plus the default values in the in-
teractive screenform Manual milling (see Fig. 4.151).
You confirm with the INPUT key.
Operating The information line guides you in graphic programming.

sequences
The programming system displays a crosshair on the screen in the
graphics area.
1. Go into the programming level
Machining/Milling/Manual milling.
2. Select the functions Rapid traverse or Feed.
3. Using the Crosshair or numeric inputs, approach the start and tar-
get points. The programming system draws a tool track with tool di-
ameter.
4. Confirm these points with the INPUT key.
5. With the softkey function OK, end machining.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
4.11.5 Solid milling

Solid
milling
Purpose The function Solid milling machines selected pockets and islands.
The Graphic Programming System calculates the tool center path (with-
out tool radius correction).
Notes on
programming
Tool Select a tool and

selection
Solid press the softkey Solid milling.

milling The machining procedure is parameterized in the interactive screen-
form Solid milling.
see Fig. 4.135, page 4–168

see Fig. 4.136, page 4–168
see Fig. 4.137, page 4–169

see Fig. 4.138, page 4–170
see Fig. 4.143, page 4–174
Fig. 4.153 Solid milling
Some parameters have already been explained on the previous pages.

Therefore, this User’s Guide does not give more detailed information at
this point.
Information given in Fig. 4.153 such as “see Fig. ... page...” refers to
the pages where these descriptions are given.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Contour The Graphic Programming System requests you to select the contours
selection that are required for solid milling.
If, for example, there is an island in a selected volume, this must be
chosen.
Pockets with different end planes are machined only up to the highest
end plane (see also parameter Strategy island heights Fig. 4.161).
Islands with different heights (start plane) can be machined together. It
is also possible to machine start planes.
The Graphic Programming System always detects the highest start and
end plane of all selected contours.
Figs. 4.154 and 4.155 below show the stock removal process for pock-
ets or islands with differently programmed start/end planes and geome-
tries.
You will have
S selected all pockets/islands and
S set the parameter Allow for strategy island heights.
X X
Highest Highest
end plane end plane
W Z W Z
Pockets not programmed to Pockets programmed to

base as geometry base as geometry
Fig. 4.154 Pockets
X X
Highest
start plane Highest
start plane
Highest Highest
end plane end plane
W Z W Z
Islands not programmed to Islands programmed to

base as geometry base as geometry
Fig. 4.155 Islands

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Contours If the outside contour is a blank contour, the blank contour is overtra-
velled up to the tool radius.
An island which is removed from the blank contour by a distance that is
less than the tool radius is thus not overtravelled and must be rema-
chined.
If the outside contour is a finished part contour, the tool moves up to
the contour.
There must be an outer pocket in order to be able to

perform automatic pocket and island identification.
Lower direct The following functions can be selected and allocated with the corre-
or over slope sponding parameters in the parameter field Lower:
or over spiral
S Lower direct
S Lower over slope
S Lower over spiral
Fig. 4.156 below displays the interactive screenform Lower when solid
milling.
CT
HP
BL
BA
HR
via via
directly
bevel spiral
Fig. 4.156 Lower over spiral, over slope or direct
In solid milling where the outer contour is not a blank, you can select for
lowering holes already programmed or cycle reference points as plunge
hole. The plunge holes must be chosen together with the pockets
and/or islands concerned.
The position of the points must be selected according to the selected
lowering strategy, the tool and the contour such that lowering will take
place without collision.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
With the lowering strategy direct, use only tools which can plunge and
support with a plunge hole if necessary.
By selecting a relief hole (or reference point), position the start point of
machining in the contour in such a way that no contour infringement
occurs when lowering over spiral.
Lift direct or In the parameter field Lift, you can select the functions:
over slope
S Lift direct
S Lift over slope
Fig. 4.157 below shows the interactive screenform for Lift with solid
milling.
CT
BL
BA
über
direkt
Schrage
Fig. 4.157 Lift direct or over slope
Strategy In the parameter field Strategy, open the following interactive screen-
form Strategy stock removal.
Fig. 4.158 Strategy stock removal

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
Maximum positioning The maximum positioning path FD only applies to stock removal with
path with feed feed (G01).
It has no effect when approaching and retracting (see Fig. 4.159).
Fig. 4.159 Maximum positioning path with feed
Machining direction It is possible to influence the machining direction in the interactive

screenform Strategy stock removal by
S clockwise
S counterclockwise
S machining direction inside–>outside
S machining direction outside–>inside
Fig. 4.160 below shows the interactive screenform Strategy stock re-
moval and the help display for the machining direction.
Fig. 4.160 Strategy machining direction
If the outer contour is a blank contour, you should select the strategy
Machining direction outside–>inside.
The system then lowers the tool outside of the blank contour and ap-
proaches.
Use the strategy Machining direction inside–>outside for pockets
that have a finished part as outer contour.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Island height The highest start plane and the highest end plane (see Figs. 4.154 and
4.155) of all selected contours are taken for the machining proposal.
Fig. 4.161 below explains the parameter Island heights.
Z Z
Highest Highest
start plane start plane
W X W X
Allow for island heights Ignore island heights
Fig. 4.161 Island height
You must select all islands concerned.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.11.6 Drilling technology
Drilling
Purpose You drill with various drilling cycles. These are the cycles L81...L89.
The programming of the standard cycles is

described separately in the “SINUMERIK 840/840C
Cycles Programming Instructions”.
Notes on You are on programming level Machining/Drilling.

programming
Select the required drilling technology, for example Deep hole.
Deep hole
Select the tool required for machining.

Tool
selection
Having selected the drill, activate the drilling function with the softkey
Value Value input and select the hole.
input
You see an interactive screenform Deep hole drilling.

You are offered graphic help for each parameter.
Note on parameter Include length of tip in calculation

Include length
S No (1) – Drilling depth equals parameterized value
of tip in calc.
S Yes (2) – Generated drilling depth is greater by the length of the tip

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
You enter the parameters as well as the approach and retraction strat-
egy and accept with the INPUT key.
Note You can follow the machining operation on the screen with the ap-
proach and retraction strategy under the function Machining simula-
tion.
Operating
sequences
1. Load a magazine with the required drilling tool using the function
Load magazine.
2. Go into the programming level Machining/Drilling.
3. Select a drilling technology.
4. Select a tool if necessary.
5. Activate the function with Value input.
6. Select the hole.
7. Enter the parameters in an interactive screenform.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.12 Machine and auxiliary functions
4.12 Machine and auxiliary functions
Machine
aux. fct.
Purpose The function Machine aux. fct. allows you to introduce your own ap-
plications.
Skip NC blocks The Graphic Programming System offers an application (macro) with
which you can skip NC blocks.
The macro is called 106 Skippable blocks.
106 Skippable blocks
Fig. 4.163 Macro “Skip blocks”
This macro inserts or resets a code character “/” in the part program.
Notes on The Graphic Programming System identifies the NC blocks concerned

programming with “/” in the part program.
Programming The following NC blocks provide an example of skipping measuring cycles.

example
%MPF1
.
.
.
N10 G00 D12 X104 F0.8 ;
/N15 R11=0 R22=1 ... L972 ;“/” Skip measuring cycle
/N20...
/N25...
N55 G01 X85 F0.6 ;end of Skip
Operating
sequences
1. Change to the programming level Machining.
2. Select the function Fct. w/o ref. point.
3. If several macros are offered, select the one you need with the cur-
sor keys and the INPUT key.
4. Enter the necessary parameters in the interactive screenform.
5. Continue with the next program steps for workpiece programming.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.13 Insert blocks
4.13 Insert blocks
Insert
block (DIN)
Purpose With the function Insert block (DIN) you can also insert instructions
when performing graphic programming.
You make entries in the input fields in the interactive screenform Insert
block corresponding to the DIN code that you expect in the part pro-
gram.
Fig. 4.164 Insert blocks
In the interactive screenform the system distinguishes between

S insert blocks (see “1” in Fig. 4.164) which the Graphic Programming
System allows for and simulates, and
S unassigned DIN code (see “2” in Fig. 4.164) which the Graphic Pro-
gramming System does not allow for (does not simulate).
Any of the following functions can appear in the part program as a DIN
block:
S zero offset
S position at feedrate or rapid traverse rate
S spindle direction of rotation and speed
S oriented spindle stop
S coolant on/off
S DIN code

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.13 Insert blocks
Notes on Every block is given a current block number by the system.

programming
With the selection field on the right next to the various input fields, you
decide whether you input the DIN command.
The meaning of the character is:
S minus “–” = no output
S plus “+” or “1,2” = output in the block
No. You enter a sequence number (e.g. “1” or “2”) for the position
(e.g. X / Z).
1 This number specifies in which order you wish to move the individual
axes X and Z (coordinates).
For example enter:
X = “1” and Z = “2” in the field “No.”
and the programming system will generate two blocks:
“N05 X... LF”
“N10 Z... LF”
If you enter X = “1” and Z = “1”, the output will be in one block:
“N05 X... Z... LF”
Unassigned DIN-Code Up to the input field Unassigned DIN code, the programming system
interprets the inputs.
Two lines are provided for the input field Unassigned DIN code. If both
these lines are filled, the programming system converts these into two
NC blocks.
If you have marked further input fields as being active, the first line of
the input line Unassigned DIN code is attached at this block. For ex-
ample:
“N... M04 Unassigned DIN code LF”
The second line is always the second block.
The following applies for the inserted blocks in the Graphic Program-
ming System:
S the Graphic Programming System transfers the inputs in the part
program under the function Create part program,
S the entries can be edited after they have been entered,
S the programming system does not simulate the written machining
steps,
S the programming system does not check and evaluate the inputs (no
syntax check).
The second line of the input field Unassigned DIN

code is always in the second NC block. If you
output X/Z positions in several blocks, you should
not enter anything in the input field Unassigned DIN
code.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.13 Insert blocks
Operating
sequences
1. Go into the programming level Machining.
2. Activate the function Insert block (DIN).
3. Enter parameters in the interactive screenform Insert blocks.
4. Mark the input fields with the selection screenform on the right
(“+”, “–“, “1...2”).
Note Unassigned DIN code is not marked as such.
5. Confirm the inputs.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
09.96
4.14 Machining simulation
Machining
simulation
Purpose The programmed tool travel motion can be demonstrated in the graphic
field on the screen with the function Machining simulation.
In Machining simulation the Graphic Programming System distin-
guishes two different cases:
S Turning without C axis option and turning with C axis option but with-
out defined planes and
S turning with C axis option and with defined planes.
Notes on Simulation is displayed on the screen with an image of the tool.
programming
The actual value display during simulation refers to the tool nose radius
centre path.
In block-by-block simulation with the Broken-line graphics setting, you
can use the softkeys Views and Screen at the end of the block.
Turning without C Before displaying the simulation of the programmed machining process
axis option and turn- in the graphics field, you can set the following simulation mode in an
ing with C axis option interactive screenform:
without
S Continuous display mode
defined planes
S Blockwise display mode
S Simulation with broken-line graphics
S Simulation with animated graphics

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
Turning with C axis The following screenform Simulation mode shown below determines
option and with de- the simulation run over the created surfaces in the Graphic Program-
fined surfaces ming System with C axis option.
Fig. 4.165 Simulation mode for C axis and defined surfaces
The following functions for simulation are available via selection fields:
Display mode
S continuous
S blockwise
S delete with screen
S delete without screen
Simulation with
S tool
S crosshair
S simple tool
Display on milling
plane S not maintained
S maintained at the end points
S always maintained
S no traversing paths

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
Operating
sequences 1. You have created a workpiece geometry and programmed the indi-
vidual machining steps.
2. Go into programming level Machining.
3. Activate the function Machining simulation.
4. Establish the features of simulation in the interactive screenform
Simulation mode and confirm with the Input key.
5. Control the simulation process by means of the functions in the hori-
zontal softkey menu.
– Next machining operation
– Skip NC block
– Blockwise/contin.
– Select surface1)
– Velocity “+”
– Velocity “–”
Fig. 4.166 Machining simulation, Graphic Programming System

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Procedure
with the function
Blockwise/contin.
Blockwise/
contin.
Situation You have pressed the function Blockwise/contin.

When you press an alphanumeric key, e.g.: space key, the Graphic
Programming System simulates each individual, internally programmed
block.
Only when you press the function Blockwise/contin. again does the
Graphic Programming System simulate the whole of the machining
operation to the end.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
4.15 Create part program
4.15 Create part program
Create
part prog.
Purpose With the function Create part prog., you can create an executable part
program in DIN code.
With existing DIN part program it is possible to allocate a new program
number to the part program.
The Graphic Programming System saves this program under a new
name. The first program is also saved.
Operating
sequences
You have machined the workpiece geometry.
Press the softkey Create part prog. to produce an executable part
Create
part prog. program.
Accept the parameters in the displayed screenform Main program end.
In the interactive screenform Tool change point PE enter the parking

position of the last tool if this is required. You can accept the default
values directly from the empirical value file for the exercise example.
The programming system generates the part program for your example.
When you press the softkey Create part prog. the

programming system calculates the part program
from the geometry and machining values specified.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
4.15.1 Edit part program
4.15.1 Edit part program
Notes on The Graphic Programming System stores the graphically generated

programming part program in a workpiece directory.
For example: “LOCAL/TEIL 1”.
A part program can be created with WOP and modi-

fied with the corresponding text editors after leaving
the Graphic Programming System.
If you call up the function Create part prog. again,

the programming system overwrites the generated
part program (e.g. “MPF1”).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16 Program steps (work schedule)
Program
steps
Purpose During graphic programming of the machining operations, the program-

ming system generates a work schedule containing the program steps
(operations) that you have programmed.
In the work schedule, you
S are provided with an overview of all graphically generated program
steps involved in machining,
S add, move, delete or edit operations for machining (not for the geom-
etry).
Notes on
programming
You can modify the work schedule, for example, by Editing the pro-
gram steps.
Editable program Editable program steps are:
steps
S Load magazine
S Load masterdata
S Beginning of program
S Tool change
S Turning/drilling operations
S End of program
S Function without reference point
S Insert block.
Blank and finished Geometries can only be altered under Geometry/edit.
part geometry

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Load magazine You load a tool magazine when you press softkey Machining for the
first time.
You can replace this magazine with another magazine (master data =
WKZ) with the function Edit program step (for procedure see Sec-
tion 4.16.2).
Beginning of program You create the “Beginning of program” when pressing the softkey Ma-
chining for the first time.
End of program You generate the “End of program” on pressing the softkey Create part
prog.. This program step must always be the last in the work schedule.
The function Create part prog. generates the “End

of program” if none exists already.
The programming system attaches additional
programming steps behind the existing “End of
program”.
Before generating a part program, check whether
there is an “End of program” in the work schedule.
The “End of program” previously inserted by Create
part prog. is then located in the middle of the
program.
If you subsequently insert program steps or
graphically program:
S You must delete the “End of program”
with Program steps/delete and
S again call up the function Create part
prog.
The system then generates a new “End of program”
as the last program step.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Operating
sequences
After calling up the vertical softkey function Program steps, the pro-
Program
steps gramming system builds up a selection screenform. This displays the
list of program steps.
Fig. 4.167 Program steps: program step names
One or several program steps is selected only after you have selected
one of the vertical functions Edit, Insert, Delete, Move, Info or Skip.
Select one of the program step functions Edit, Insert, Delete, Move,
Vertical Info or Skip from the vertical softkey menu.
Then place the cursor on the required program step.
Execute the function by pressing the INPUT key
or abort using the RECALL key.
Press the CLEAR key to cancel the last operator action in the editing
mode.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.1 Combining program steps in a block
4.16.1 Combining program steps in a block
Purpose Using the functions Delete, Move or Skip you can combine several
consecutive program steps to form one block by following the operating
sequences below.
Operating You have activated the function Program steps, the program steps are
sequences listed (see Fig. 4.167).
Vertical 1. Select one of the program functions Delete, Move or Skip from the
vertical softkey menu bar.
2. Then place the cursor onto the first program step which is to be part
of the block.
3. Mark the first program step with this key. The program step is
marked with a colour.
4. Then place the cursor onto the last program step which is to be part
of the block.
5. Now mark the required block of program steps.
6. Fig. 4.168 shows an example with the function Move.
Fig. 4.168 Program steps in a block
7. Conclude the block selection function with the INPUT key.
8. Execute the function Delete, Move or Skip using the INPUT key for
the selected block
or abort with the RECALL key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.2 Edit program step
4.16.2 Edit program step
Edit
Purpose Using the Edit function you can edit

S the parameters for a program step, or
S the program step name.
The procedure for editing program steps is the same as for generating
them originally.
Blank and finished part geometries can only be

altered under Geometry/edit.
Operating You are in the function Program steps and the program step overview
sequences is displayed.
(example)
Edit 1. Press the softkey Edit.
2. Position the cursor, for example, on Tool change (or Load maga-
zine etc.)
3. and activate the Edit function.
Note You can now correct the program step in detail.
4. You close the interactive screenform (Tool change point in this ex-
ample) with the INPUT key.
This opens the selection screenform with the tools (or e.g.: tool mag-
azines (WKZ = masterdata catalog)) of the current tool magazine.
5. You can select a different tool (or a tool magazine, for example) with
the cursor keys
6. and then replace with the INPUT key.

At the same time you leave the function Edit,
or abort the function with the RECALL key.
When you exit the function Edit with the INPUT key, the function is
completed and the vertical softkey bar is again on the basic level for the
function Program steps.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.3 Edit program step name
4.16.3 Edit program step name
Edit
Purpose You can alter the text of a program step for an operation.
Notes on The text for Beginning of program, Load magazine, Load masterdata
programming and End of program cannot be edited.
Operating se-
quences
(example)
Edit 1. Press the softkey Edit
2. place the cursor on Tool change
3. and with this key open the interactive screenform for the comments
text, the program step name.
Fig. 4.169 Edit program step name
A ... ...
... Z 4. Edit the text using the alphanumeric keyboard.
5. Terminate editing of the program step name by pressing the INPUT

key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.94
4.16.4 Insert program steps
Insert
Purpose The function Insert adds in the work schedule:

S individual program steps, or
S program step sequences
Notes on
programming
You insert the new program steps in front of the
selected program step.
Only program steps for the technology in question
can be inserted.
When Insert is active, you may not perform save or
read-in operations.
Operating
sequences
(example)
Insert 1. Press the softkey Insert.
2. The command line requests you to place the cursor on the input
position.
Place the cursor onto the program step in front of which you wish to
insert.
3. When you press the INPUT key you activate the function Insert.
As long as you are in the program step function

Insert, the line above the graphics area displays an
Insert (see Fig. 4.170).

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
Fig. 4.170 Insert program steps
Exit the function In-

sert
If you want to end the function Insert, press the softkey Program
Program
steps
steps
and then the softkey Insert off.

Insert
off
The programming system computes the new program steps for machin-
ing.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.5 Delete program steps
4.16.5 Delete program steps
Delete
Purpose You delete the complete program step with the softkey Delete.
You can combine several program steps to form a block.
Note The delete function is not executed for the function “Workholder”, if
(e.g. when activating the workholder) the programming system refers to
the next program step (move workholder).
The block that is to be deleted must not contain two steps that refer to
one workholder.
Procedure
(example)
Delete 1. Press the softkey Delete.
The operation marked in colour can be deleted.
2. Position the cursor on the program step to be deleted.
3. You delete the entire operation by pressing the INPUT key.

The programming system then recomputes all operations.
You can cancel the delete operation while the function Program steps
is active by pressing the CLEAR key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.6 Move program steps
4.16.6 Move program steps
Move
Purpose The function Move transfers the program steps of a selected operation
to another point in the work schedule.
Notes on
programming
You always move in front of the selected program
step.
You can combine several program steps to form one block.
Operating
sequences
(example)
Move 1. Press the softkey Move.
2. Position the cursor to the program step (operation) that you wish to
move
3. and activate the function.
Fig. 4.171 Move program steps
4. Now select the program step in front of which you wish to insert
5. and conclude the function.

The program step overview appears with the moved operation.
Press the function Recalculate and the programming system will recal-
Recalculate culate the machining operations.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.7 Program step info
4.16.7 Program step info1)
Info
The description described below for Info is required

when programming an end face or a peripheral
surface1).
Purpose If you wish to find out which program step belongs to the tool travel
paths shown in the graphics area, then make use of the function Info.
Having selected the program step in the work schedule, you will see
this operation highlighted in colour on the workpiece geometry.
Operating
sequences
(example)
Press the softkey Info.
Info
Then move the cursor to the program step for the operation.
You obtain information on the graphically programmed program steps.

To do this, go into the program step detail view.
Move the cursor to the operation on which you require information
and activate the function Program steps/Info.
You recognize the selected program step by the highlighted contour or

machining operation.
The information line provides operating guidance.
Exit the function by pressing the INPUT key.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.8 Recalculate program steps
4.16.8 Recalculate program steps
Recal-
culate
Purpose If you have changed the work schedule and wish to remain in the func-
tion Program steps and to see the result of the change, then press the
softkey Recalculate.
Notes on On exiting the function Program steps, the programming system also
programming recalculates the modified program steps.
The function Recalculate cannot be aborted.
Operating se-
quences
Recalc- After activating the softkey function Recalculate, the programming sys-
ulate tem calculates the defined program steps and then reconstructs the up-
dated geometry with its tool travel paths.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.16.9 Conceal program steps
4.16.9 Conceal program steps
Conceal
Purpose Program steps that you do not require at the moment for a specific ma-
chining sequence can be concealed without being deleted by activating
the function Conceal. You can deactivate this function at any time.
Notes on
programming
In the selection screenform of the program steps,
concealed operations are marked with a “ * ”.
You can combine several program steps to one block.
Procedure
(example)
Conceal 1. You are at the program step overview level and press the softkey
Conceal.
2. You move the cursor to the program step that you wish to conceal.
3. Activate the function Program step/Conceal by pressing the INPUT

key.
The contour or machining sequence is no longer displayed and this
indicates that the program step is no longer a part of the work
schedule. However, the program step is retained in the work sched-
ule and
Conceal can be re-activated by pressing the softkey Conceal once again.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.17 Vertical sofftkey functions
4.17 Vertical softkey functions
If, when programming your workpiece, you

S wish to save the data
S wish to change the views, or
S require information on the geometry
then you make use of the functions in the vertical softkey menu.
These functions in the vertical softkey menu are available to you at all
levels of programming.
The functions:
S Save
S Read
S Views
S Screen
S Representation
S Info
and the menu tree are described in the Appendix.
Notes on automatic
saving of data
The Graphic Programming System saves the contour and the machin-
ing operations you have programmed at certain intervals (approx.
5 min).
If you did not save your work previous to a system failure (cold restart
or power failure), you can use the Read/Read Auto Save function to
recall the latest version of your work automatically stored.
The auto save function is not performed if

S an oriented geometry is generated
S a help geometry is generated.
The Save function deletes the last file automatically saved. The Read/
Read original function can then be used for reading any changes or
modifications.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.18 Pocket calculator function
Purpose The Graphic Programming System has a pocket calculator function.

You can call up the pocket calculator without exiting the selected inter-
active screenform.
Notes on
programming
If the cursor is in a numeric input field in the interactive screenform on
the screen,
you can call up a pocket calculator function by pressing this key.
If the cursor is positioned on a text selection field

this key steps through the individual selections.
The pocket calculator functions in accordance with the basic rules of

arithmetic which are described below.
Operating
sequences
After calling up the pocket calculator, an input field appears with the
cursor at the beginning of it. You can perform calculations in this field.
Entries are possible for calculations that exceed the length of the input
field.
When the beginning or the end of the input field is reached, the text is
rolled beyond the input field (window function). The current inputs are
displayed and the numbers and letters entered initially disappear from
the display although they are included in the calculation.
No more than 80 characters may be entered.
The following keys are available for editing the input field:
You move the cursor by one position to the right but not beyond the first
free position behind the entry.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
You move the cursor by one position to the left but no further than the
beginning of the input field.
You place the cursor at the beginning of the line.
You put the cursor on the first free position behind the entered text.
You put the cursor on the first position in the interactive screenform.
You put the cursor on the last character in the interactive screenform. If
the entry is shorter than the input field, the cursor is placed at the first
free position behind the text.
You delete the whole entry (without confirming!). The text for the pre-
vious pocket calculator function call is displayed.
With this key you terminate input and start calculation of the expres-
sion. The result is displayed.
If you wish to exit the pocket calculator and transfer the result to the
input field, then press this key once again.
Abort the pocket calculator function and return to the program, or to the
original contents of the input field from which you called the pocket cal-
culator.
Input error In the case of an input error, the pocket calculator is not exited.
Instead, the cursor moves automatically to the location of the input er-
ror.
You can correct the input
or abort the pocket calculator function.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.18.1 Basic arithmetic operations
4.18.1 Basic arithmetic operations

The symbols for the four basic arithmetic operations are:
Symbol Operation
+ Addition
– Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
Addition and subtraction have lower priority than division and multiplica-
tion.
Multiplication and division are performed before

addition and subtraction.
Example Input: 5+5*2

Result: 15; because 5*2 is calculated first. Then the first 5 is added.
4.18.2 Operators
Symbol Operation
^ Exponentiation
% Percentage increase/decrease
Exponentiation has a higher priority than division or multiplication.

Example Input: 2*2^2
Result: 8; because the multiplication is performed last.
The percentage increase or decrease has the highest priority of the op-
erators. Consequently, this operation is always the first to be performed
in an expression.
Example Input: 2*200%10
Result: 440, increase of 10 percent.
Note A negative number must be used for a decrease, i.e. a 20-percent de-
crease would be entered as follows: 200%–20.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.18.5 Functions
4.18.3 Signs
“+” or “–” are permissible as signs before any number or variable and
with all operations. Signs are not permissible before functions and
brackets.
4.18.4 Brackets
Execution of an expression can be controlled by using brackets. Paren-
theses (i.e. round brackets) are used as bracket symbols at all levels.
A maximum of 10 nesting levels is available. This maximum is limited if
a great number of operations with different priority follow each other.
Example Input: 2.5*(3+100)
Result: 257.5
The addition is performed first in this expression and it is followed by
the multiplication.
4.18.5 Functions
The range of functions includes the trigonometric functions and their
inverse functions as well as logarithmic functions and conversion func-
tions of technical importance.
The argument must be specified in parentheses for all functions. The
argument can also be a mathematical expression consisting of opera-
tions and further functions.
Examples
S Input: SIN(90)
Result: 1
The sine of 90 degrees is calculated.
S Input: COS(SQR(4*4))
Result: 0.9976
The product 4*4 is calculated, its square root is determined and fi-
nally the cosine of the result is formed.
Note In general, the angular unit for the trigonometric functions is degrees.
Appropriate functions are available for converting from and into ra-
diants.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.18.5 Functions
List of available functions:
Name Function
ABS Absolute value

ACS Arc cosine
ASN Arc sine
ATN Arc tangent
CME Conversion from inches into cm
COS Cosine
DEC Conversion from sexagesimal angular measurement into
decimal angular measurement.
The argument has the same format as the result of DMS.
DEG Conversion from radians into degrees.
DMS Conversion from decimal angular measurement to sexa-
gesimal angular measurement.
The result has the following format: AA.MMSS
AA Angle
MM Minutes
SS Seconds
EXP Inverse function for natural logarithm
FAC Factorial
FMT Expanded format specification: A value is only used if it is
not “NL”.
Example:
FMT(“+07.30>”)
+ With “+” sign (“–” is always output)
0 With leading zeros
7 Total number of places in front of the decimal
point (including sign)
. Separator between integer and fractional part
(e.g. “,”, “.”, “;”)
3 Total number of places behind the decimal point
0 With trailing zeros
> Output the number in right-justified (left-justified)
format
FOR Format specification for representation of result and con-
version of numeric variables into string variables.
Example:
FOR(10.4) sets the standard format with an overall length
of 10 places and 4 places behind the point. By specifying
a negative format, leading zeros are output.
The greatest settable format is 20.9.
INC Conversion from cm into inches.
INT Integer component
LNA Natural logarithm to the base of e
LOG Common logarithm to the base of 10

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
4.18.5 Functions
Name Function
MAC Contents of the specified variables are used as formula in

the expression.
RAD Conversion from degrees into radians
SGN Sign
SGN = –1 if result < 0
SGN = 1 if result > 0
SGN = 0 if result = 0
e.g.: Input: SGN (12–20) Result: –1
SIN Sine
SQR Calculates square root
TAN Tangent
TEN Inverse function for common logarithm
TRU Removes all trailing blanks in the specified numerical
places.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
11.95
4.19 Exit WOP function
4.19 Exit WOP function
Before you leave the Graphic Programming System please read the
information given in this section carefully.
Purpose It tells you how to save the files that you have created with the Graphic
Programming System.
Notes on
programming
Workpiece geometry If you change to a new workpiece, the programming system asks you
and machining whether you wish to save the workpiece geometry and machining
operation.
You can also save your workpiece geometry and machining
Save specifications with the vertical softkey Save while programming in the
Graphic Programming System.
Note You always operate under a workpiece name (e.g. “PART1”) in the
Graphic Programming System.
Part program When you have concluded the function Create part prog. the Graphic
Programming System stores the part program in its workpiece directory
(e.g. “PART1”). You do not have to save it.
J

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5 Appendix
This Section 5 describes

S the menu trees of the Graphic Programming System functions
S the various functions in horizontal and vertical softkey bars
S and the tool types and their parameters.
Notes If you do not use a C axis, the description of the “Drilling and milling”
functions in Section 5.3 and the “Milling” tool types are not applicable.
Base level horizon-
tal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tools Geometry Machin- Select Machining Create End

Material ing surface 1) simulation part prog.
Selection of a Exit WOP program-

s.p. surface from ming without saving
a list the programmed ge-
5–4 ometry or machining
The programmed The programming

machining operation system generates
is simulated schemat- NC blocks to DIN
ically on the screen.
Surface is a Surface is a peripheral Surface is a Surface is an end

cylindrical surface surface or end face cylindrical surface face or peripheral
(turning geometry) (milling or drilling (turning) surface (milling or
geometry)1) drilling)1)
see p. see p. see p. see p.

5–8 5–29 5–16 5–42
Function descriptions of the softkeys

are provided in the tables below.
The numbers above each softkey in the diagram 1.1.7.2
correspond to the numbers of the function Copy
descriptions in the tables. workholder
Fig. 5.1 Functions of the horizontal softkey bar at the base level

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
Menu tree Functions Function description

number
1 Tools and For generating and managing tools, tool masterdata, tool
material user magazines and material list with the functions
S Masterdata magazine
S Material data.
2 Geometry You create and alter blank and finished part contours
using oriented contour definition or standard forms and
define machining surfaces
S Create new
S Edit
S Delete
S Copy
S Create (define) surface 1),
S Select surface1) and
S Edit surface1).
3 Machining You define the machining operation for the active ma-
chining plane. If the C axis option is enabled the avail-
able machining operations are adapted to the active
plane.
S Turning plane
– Clamping,
– Turning,
– Drill concentric,
S End face/peripheral surface
– milling,
– drilling,
S Machine auxiliary functions and
S Insert block (DIN).
4 Select You select the active plane for the next machining opera-
surface 1) tions.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix

number
5 Machining You simulate the programmed machining operation on

simulation the active plane or transferred to the correct position.
While this function is active you can change the repre-
sentation using the following functions:
S Jump to next machining operation
S Jump to next NC block
S Switch between blockwise/continuous simulation
S Speed + (faster) and
S Speed – (slower)
6 Create part You create a part program from the machining steps.
program
If you do not give a new name to the part program, the
previous part program is overwritten.
Caution: Any changes you have made directly in the
part program are lost.
7 End You exit WOP programming without saving the pro-
grammed workpiece geometry and machining.
Note: If you require workpiece programming again
you can read in the last geometry and
machining to be saved automatically by the
programming system with the function
Read/AutoSave.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
11.95
5.1 Tools Material
5.1 Tools Material
1
Tools
Material
1.1 1.4
Masterdata Material
magazine data
1.4.1 1.4.2
Modify Save
mat. list mat. list
Modify or add to new

or existing material
1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7
Load New Save Load Save Work-

Tool holder
magazine magazine magazine masterdata masterdata
Select and load Define and fill a

new magazine. 1.1.7.1 1.1.7.2 1.1.7.3 1.1.7.4
a magazine.
Workholder Copy Modify Delete
new workholder workholder workholder
1.1.6.1 1.1.6.2 1.1.6.3 1.1.6.4
New Copy Change Delete

tool tool tool tool
Operator guidance via inter-
active screenforms and Yes?
schematic displays of the geo- No?
Yes? metry (not with copy function).
No?
1.1.6.3.1 1.1.6.3.2 1.1.6.3.3 1.1.6.3.4 1.1.6.M.1 1.1.6.M.2 1.1.6.M.3
T– and Geometry Techno- Accept Edit Abort

All
D-number data logy
Operator guidance via inter-

active forms and schematic
representation of geometry
(not when copying).
1.1.6.M.1 1.1.6.M.2 1.1.6.M.3
Accept Edit Abort
Fig. 5.2 Functions Tools Material

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.1 Tools Material
Menu tree Functions Functions description

number
1 Tools For generating and managing tools, tool masterdata, tool

Material user magazines and material list with the functions
S Masterdata magazine
S Material data
1.1 Masterdata You can change the parameters for the tool master data
magazine or the tools stored in a specific magazine or add new pa-
rameters.
The functions are:
S Load magazine
S New magazine
S Save magazine
S Load masterdata
S Save masterdata
S Tool
S Workholder
1.1.1 Load magazine The available tool magazines are displayed and you can
select the one you require.
1.1.2 New magazine You generate a new magazine using the tools from the
tool master data.
You copy the selected tool from the tool master data into
the magazine currently loaded. Make sure that the tool
ID number is unambiguous when copying within the
master data.
1.1.3 Save magazine You save the modified or added tools in the magazine
currently loaded or in a new magazine.
1.1.4 Load You load the tool master data and are then able to edit
masterdata them.
1.1.5 Save You save the modified or added tools in the master data.
masterdata
1.1.6 Tool You generate or change tools (preferably in the master
data) using the following functions
S New tool
S Copy tool
S Change tool
S Delete tool.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
11.95
5.1 Tools Material

number
1.1.6.1 New You generate all geometrical and technological

tool parameters of a tool you have selected from a type list.
The system displays the geometry of the tool. Tool input
is in five steps:
1. Select type of machining turning.
2. Select tool type.
3. Enter the general tool characteristic data.
Note: The tool ID number must be unambiguous.
Each tool has its own number.
4. Enter the tool geometry data.
5. Enter the cutting value file assigned to the material
group.
1.1.6.2 Copy There are two types of copying.
tool
S You copy within the tool master data after having
loaded the master data.
S You copy a tool from the master data into the tool
user magazine that you have loaded.
When copying within the master data, always make sure
that the tool ID number is unambiguous.
1.1.6.3 Change In the tool magazine loaded, the tool parameters are
tool changed with the functions
S All
S T and D numbers
S Geometry data
S Technology
1.1.6.3.1 All The selected tool is changed in three steps:
1. Enter general tool characteristic data. The tool ID
number must be unambiguous.
2. Enter the tool geometry data.
3. Enter the material-dependant cutting data.
1.1.6.3.2 T and D num- You change the name, the T or D number, the ID text
bers and the feed parameters.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
11.95 5 Appendix
5.1 Tools Material

number
1.1.6.3.3 Geometry data You change the geometry data and the insert position.
1.1.6.3.4 Technology You change the tool cutting values.
1.1.6.M.1 Accept The displayed tool geometry is confirmed and you are
interactively prompted for the parameters of the cutting
values for the individual materials.
1.1.6.M.2 Edit This function enables you to change the parameters of
the preceding interactive forms.
1.1.6.M.3 Abort The generated geometry is ignored.
1.1.6.4 Delete You delete the selected tool in the tool magazine cur-
tool rently loaded.
1.1.7 Workholder You edit a workholder.
1.1.7.1 Workholder You create a new workholder according to the work

new holder type.
1.1.7.2 Copy You copy a workholder from the master data into the tool
workholder data currently loaded.
1.1.7.3 Modify You alter a workholder in the tool data currently loaded.
workholder
1.1.7.4 Delete You delete a workholder from the tool data currently
workholder loaded.
1.4 Material data You alter the material list. You can enter new materials. If
you have made any changes you must save the material
list. Only then will the changes be activated. These are
the functions:
S Modify material list and
S Save material list.
1.4.1 Modify You can generate a material list for the workpiece.
mat. list
1.4.2 Save The changes and additions are stored in the material list.
mat. list

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.2 Turning
5.2 Turning
5.2.1 Geometry
2
Geometry
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
Create Create Select Edit
Edit Delete Copy
new surface1) surface1) surface1)
Edit or delete contours Selection of a surface

in graphic representa- from a list
tion by means of
selection control.
2.4.1 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.7.1 2.7.2
Move From Free Change Delete
rotate turned part definition surface surface
2.1
2.4.1.1
Fig. 5.3 Functions Geometry (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.2.1 Geometry
Menu tree for The following diagram shows the menu tree structure and the
Copy function procedure for the function Copy on the turning plane. The information
line comment is shown in quotation marks.
Programming level
Programming level 2.4.1.1 Geometry/Copy
Geometry
“Select contour ↑↓ <INPUT>”

2.4.1 2.4.2
Contour de- Contour de-

finition start finition end
“Accept end element with <ret>”
“Accept initial element with <ret>”
“SK1 or SK2 or accept with <ret> or abort with <recall>”
Contour Contour
def. start def. end
“Accept end element with <ret>”
“Accept initial element with <ret>”
Select further contour or end selection with <INPUT>
Interactive screenform
Fig. 5.4 Functions Geometry/Copy/Move/Turning (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.2.1 Geometry
2.1
Create
new
2.1.1 2.1.2
Finished
Blank
part
2.1.1.1 2.1.1.4 2.1.1.5

Oriented From fin-
Cylinder
geometry ished part
Select contour
Two screenforms and enter Interactive screenform
allowance
2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 2.1.1.3 2.1.1.6 2.1.1.7

Oriented Edit Form
elements Abort OK
geometry elements
2.1.1.2.1 2.1.1.2.2 2.1.1.2.3 2.1.1.3.1 2.1.1.3.2 2.1.1.3.3 2.1.1.3.4
Change Erase Select Recess Undercut Thread Thread

element element variants undercut
2.1.1.3.4.1 2.1.1.3.4.2 2.1.1.3.4.3
DIN DIN INCH
1. Select element graphi-
Form A Form B
cally
2.1.1.3.2.1 2.1.1.3.2.2 2.1.1.3.2.4 2.1.1.3.2.5
2. Parameter input in an in-
teractive screenform DIN DIN
longit. face
Form E Form F
1. Select element graphically

2. Solutions computed by the programming
system are displayed
2.1.1.1.1 2.1.1.1.2 2.1.1.1.3 2.1.1.1.4 2.1.1.1.5 2.1.1.1.6 2.1.1.1.7
Line Line Line Line Line Arc Arc
right left up down any left ccw right cw
The following applies for the geometry element to be constructed (line/arc):
1. Parameter inputs in an interactive screenform.

2. a: Displays of the solution (where there are two possible solutions, selection via softkey
menu).
b: The construction (display of the solution) of the element is solved by the programming
system with the parameters entered for the next element or the one after that.
Fig. 5.5 Functions Geometry/Create New (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.2.1 Geometry

number
S Create new
S Edit
S Delete
S Copy
S Create (define) surface 1),
S Select surface1)
S Edit surface1).
2.1 Create You create the following types of geometry elements:
new
S Blank
S Finished part
2.1.1 Blank You create the blank contour of the workpiece by
defining the material and blank name using the functions
S Oriented geometry
S From finished part
S Cylinder
2.1.1.1 Oriented geo- Join an oriented element (straight line, arc) to an
metry oriented contour definition.
2.1.1.1.1 Line Generate an oriented line with angle 0°.
right
left
up
down
2.1.1.1.5 Line Generate an oriented line with a user-defined start angle.
any
2.1.1.1.6 Arc Generate an oriented arc counterclockwise (left, ccw).
left ccw
2.1.1.1.7 Arc Generate an oriented arc clockwise (right, cw).
right cw

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.2.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.2 Edit Edit the parameters of the selected element.

elements
2.1.1.2.1 Change Change the numeric parameters of the selected oriented
element contour element.
2.1.1.2.2 Erase Erase the selected oriented contour element.
element
2.1.1.2.3 Select Select another construction variant if there are several
variant possible solutions.
2.1.1.3 Form You define the form elements
elements
S Recess
S Undercut
S Thread
S Thread undercut
2.1.1.3.1 Recess You create a recess behind the selected element.
2.1.1.3.2 Undercut You create an undercut on the current straight line ele-
ment in the following form:
S DIN Form E
S DIN Form F
S longitudinal
S face
2.1.1.3.2.1 DIN
Form E
DE
X R
DI
Z
e.g.: for workpieces with a machining surface

2.1.1.3.2.2 DIN
Form F
DE
X R
DI
Z
e.g.: for workpieces with two machining surfaces at right

angles to each other

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.2.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.3.2.4 longitudinal X
Width
Depth
Z
2.1.1.3.2.5 face Depth
X
Width
Z
2.1.1.3.3 Thread You create a thread on the current straight line element.
2.1.1.3.4 Thread You create a thread undercut of
undercut
S Form A,
S Form B or
S INCH
on the current straight line element with thread.
2.1.1.3.4.1 DIN Regular form
Form A
A
X
f1 P
Z f1 = 3 V P
2.1.1.3.4.2 DIN
Form B
A
X
Short thread
undercuts f1 P
Z f1 = 2 V P
2.1.1.3.4.3 INCH Special form for “inch” unit

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.2.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.4 From finished If you have only created a finished part you can convert
part this to a blank.
Note:
In addition to the dimension of the finished part contour,
a blank allowance can be programmed.
This function can only be executed on one created fin-
ished part.
2.1.1.5 Cylinder You define a cylinder contour. The cylinder can either be
a solid or hollow cylinder. This contour determines the
blank contour.
2.1.2 Finished You create a workpiece finished part contour using the
part functions
S Oriented geometry and
S Cylinder.
2.2 Edit You select a contour graphically and edit the parameters
directly in an interactive screenform.
2.3 Delete You select a contour graphically and delete it after the
request for confirmation.
2.4 Copy contour You copy the contour or contour definition which you
have selected graphically to the defined position.
You define individual contour elements with the functions
S Contour definition start and
S Contour defiinition end.
2.4.1 Move See “Copy”
rotate
2.4.1.1 Contour Once you have selected a contour, select the individual
definition start contour elements from this contour definition.
You copy or move these elements.
You move in the Z or X direction.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.2.1 Geometry

number
2.4.1.2 Contour When you have selected a contour, you select individual
definition end contour elements from this contour definition.
You copy or move these elements.
You move in the Z or X direction.
2.5 Create (define) You create new surfaces which you can either define di-
surface1) rectly from the turned part or can define freely.
These surfaces are either
S an end face or
S a peripheral surface.
2.5.1 Form turned You select a geometry element that the system defines
part as an end face or a peripheral surface directly from the
created turned part as finished part.
2.5.2 Free definition You can create an end face or a peripheral surface any-
where in the coordinate system independently of the
turned part.
2.6 Select surface1) You select the active plane for the next graphic program-
ming operations.
2.7 Edit surface1) The dimensions of created surface can be edited or de-
leted.
2.7.1 Change surface You change the parameters of a created surface.
2.7.2 Delete surface You delete a created surface.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
09.96
5.2.2 Machining
5.2.2 Machining
3
Machining
Interactive
screenform
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Clamping Turning Drill Machine Insert

concentric aux. fct. block (DIN)
1. Select function Interactive

screenform
3.2 2. Parameter input in the
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4

Chuck Shift Deactivate Reclamp
selection
A workholder is se- Interactive Interactive

lected interactively screenform screenform
with the programming
system.
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5
Counter- Bore to
Centre Deep hole Thread
sink DIN
3.3.1.1 3.3.1.2 3.3.5.1 3.3.5.2 3.3.5.3 3.3.5.4 3.3.5.5
Tool Value
Bore 1 Bore 2 Bore 3 Bore 4 Bore 5
selection input
1. Select contours graphically with the selection control

2. Parameter input in an interactive screenform.
3.3.1.1 3.3.1.2 3.3.1.3 3.3.1.4 3.3.1.5

ID Geometry
All T number D number number data
A tool is selected
interactively with
the programming
system.
Fig. 5.6 Functions Machining (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix
5.2.3 Turning
5.2.3 Turning
3.2
Turning
3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4
Finish Thread
Roughing Grooving
cut cutting
3.2.4.1 3.2.4.3 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5
Standard Thread Contour Cutoff

groove undercut grooving
3.3.1.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3
Tool Longit. Face 3.3.1.1 3.2.4.1.2 3.2.4.1.4

selection fin. cut fin. cut
Tool Rough Finish
selection grooving grooving
3.2.4.1.2.1 3.2.4.1.2.2
Longit. Face
grooving recessing
3.3.1.1 3.1.4.4.1
Tool Value
selection input
3.3.1.1 3.2.4.1.2 3.2.4.1.3 3.2.4.1.4
Tool Rough Rough/fin. Finish

selection grooving grooving grooving
3.3.1.1 3.2.4.1.2 3.2.4.1.3 3.2.4.1.4
Tool Rough Rough/fin. Finish

selection grooving grooving grooving
3.3.1.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 3.2.3.4 3.2.4.1.2.1 3.2.4.1.2.2
Tool Longit. Facing Taper Longitud. Face

selection thread thread thread grooving recessing
3.3.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.1.5
Tool Longit. Facing Longit. Face

selection thread thread cont. par. cont. par.
Fig. 5.7 Functions Machining/Turning (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
09.96
5.2.3 Turning

number
chining plane. If the C axis option is enabled the avail-
able machining operations are adapted to the active
plane.
S Turning plane
– Clamping
– Turning
– Drill concentric
S End face/peripheral surface
– milling
– drilling
S Machine auxiliary functions
S Insert block (DIN).
3.1 Clamping You select a workholder from the tool data, position or
deactivate it with the functions
S Chuck selection
S Move
S Deactivate
3.1.1 Chuck You select a workholder for the workpiece from the
select. loaded tool magazine.
3.1.2 Move You move a workholder into the correct position to chuck
the workpiece.
You select the workholder using the cursor keys and
move it into the correct position.
3.1.3 Deactivate You select a particular workholder and switch it off for
machining.
You can no longer see the workholder in the graphic
area.
3.1.4 Reclamping Turn the workpiece to reclamp.
The system calculates an imaginary axis from the origi-
nal blank through the centre of the workpiece and mirrors
the workpiece.
Once the workpiece is mirrored you can select a new
workholder with the function Workholder selection. The
graphic programming system recognizes the finished
part last machined and clamps directly on the finished
part.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.2.3 Turning

number
3.2 Turning You create a turning operation with the functions

S Roughing
S Finishing
S Thread cutting
S Grooving
3.2.1 Roughing You select a tool, define the strategy, select the contour
to be machined and machine with the functions
S Tool selection
S Longitudinal roughing
S Face roughing
S Longitudinal parallel to contour
S Face parallel to contour
3.2.1.2 Longit. You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
roughing point and end point of the machining operation “Longitu-
dinal Ö”.
3.2.1.3 Face You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
roughing point and end point of the machining operation “Face”.
3.2.1.4 Longitudinal You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
parallel to point and end point of the machining operation “Longitu-
contour dinal”.
The roughing operation is executed parallel to the con-
tour at a constant stock removal volume.
3.2.1.5 Face parallel to You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
contour point and end point of the machining operation “Face”.
The roughing operation is executed parallel to the con-
tour at a constant stock removal volume.
3.2.2 Finishing You select a tool, define the strategy, select the contour
to be machined and machine with the functions
S Tool selection
S Longitudinal finishing
S Face finishing
3.2.2.2 Longit. You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
finishing point and end point of the machining operation “Longitu-
dinal”.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.2.3 Turning

number
3.2.2.3 Face finishing You select a workpiece contour and then define the initial
point and end point of the machining operation “Face”.
3.2.3 Thread cutting You select a tool and define the machining operation with
the functions
S Tool change
S Longitudinal thread
S Facing thread
S Taper thread
3.2.3.2 Longit. You select the contour created as a form element under
thread the function geometry with the cursor control and define
the technology.
3.2.3.3 Facing thread You select the contour created as a form element under
the function geometry with the cursor control and define
the technology.
3.2.3.4 Taper thread You select the contour created as a form element under
the function geometry with the cursor control and define
the technology.
3.2.4 Grooving You select one of the following functions
S Standard groove
S Thread undercut
S Cutoff
3.2.4.1 Standard You select a tool and define the machining operation with
groove the functions
S Tool selection
S Rough-grooving
S Rough/fin. grooving
S Finish grooving
3.2.4.1.2 Rough You select a form element recess for the technology
grooving rough grooving.
3.2.4.1.2.1 Longit. You select the contour created as a form element under
grooving the function geometry with the cursor control and define
the technology.
3.2.4.1.2.2 Face You select the contour created as a form element under
recessing the function geometry with the cursor control and define
the technology.
3.2.4.1.3 Rough/fin. You select a form element recess for the technology
grooving rough/finish grooving.
3.2.4.1.4 Finish You select a form element recess for the technology
grooving rough/finish grooving.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix
5.2.3 Turning

number
3.2.4.3 Thread You select a tool and define the machining operation with
undercut the functions
S Tool selection,
S Rough-grooving,
S Rough/finish grooving and
S Finish grooving.
3.2.4.4 Contour You select a contour of the workpiece and then define
grooving the starting and end point of the machining operation
“Grooving”. Grooving is performed parallel to the contour.
3.2.4.5 Cutoff You select a form element recess for the technology
cutoff.
3.3 Drill You create a concentric drilling machining operation.
concentric
3.3.1 Centre You select a tool for the drilling operation and graphically
select the holes to be machined.
3.3.1.1 Tool selection You determine the tool change point, strategy and select
the tool.
You can search for and select the tool with the functions
S All
S T number
S D number
S ID number
S Geometry data
3.3.1.1.1 All You select one tool from all tools in the magazine.
3.3.1.1.2 T number Direct selection of a tool according to the T number.
3.3.1.1.3 D number Direct selection of a tool according to the D number.
3.3.1.1.4 ID number Direct selection of a tool according to the ID number.
3.3.1.1.5 Geometry data Selection of a tool according to a geometry search
pattern.
3.3.1.2 Value input You select the hole points and then enter the
technological parameters for the drilling technology in an
interactive screenform.
3.3.2 Countersink You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
hole to be machined.
3.3.3 Deep hole You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
hole to be machined.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
09.96
5.2.4 Vertical softkey bar Turning
5.2.4 Vertical softkey bar Turning
Save 1
2.1
2 Read
Read
original
2.2
3 3.1 Read
Views Longit.
autosave
section
4 4.1 3.2 2.3
Screen Refresh Front New
view
Repre- 5 4.2 3.3
sentation Select Longit.
viewport section P
Program 6 6.1 4.3 3.4
info Const. geo Set DIN
element viewport isometry
Program 7 7.1 6.2 5.3 4.4 3.5
steps Const. geo. Coord. sys. Move Rotate
Edit dist/angle on/off viewport isometry
7.2 6.3 5.4 4.5 3.6
Contour Dir. arrows Enter Set
Insert on/off viewport 4 views
element
6.4 5.5 4.6 3.7
7.3 Dimension
Contour Setup Activate
Delete dist/angle on/off 4 views
7.4 6.5 5.6
System All planes
Move status on/off
5.7
Display
plane sel.
7.6
Recalculate 4.6.1
Colour
7.7 text
Skip 4.6.2
Colour
7.2.1 graphics
Insert 4.6.3
off Save
setup
7.2.2
Insert
Fig. 5.8 Functions Vertical softkey bar (Turning plane)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix
5.2.4 Vertical softkey menu Turning

number
1 Save You save the current geometry file. You have entered the
name in the programming system under
program.(WOP) before calling the Workpiece/New func-
tion.
2 Read You use the following functions for reading or initializing
the workpiece file:
S Read original
S Read autosave
S Initialize
2.1 Read You read the geometry file you have saved last. The geo-
original metrical data generated in the graphics display are lost.
2.2 Read The Graphic Programming System automatically saves
autosave your programmed geometry and machining after a cer-
tain interval. This interval can be entered at any time with
this softkey.
2.3 New All geometry and machining data are deleted. You com-
pletely reprogram the workpiece under the same name.
3 Views You can use the following views for displaying the work-
piece geometry:
S Longitudinal section
S Front view
S Longitudinal section P
S DIN isometry
S Rotate isometry
S Set 4 views
S Activate 4 views
3.1 Longit. You view the workpiece as section without sectional
section lines.
3.2 Front view You change your workpiece view to view from the front.
3.3 Longit. You view the workpiece as section with all sectional
section P lines.
3.4 DIN You change your workpiece view to top view from diago-
isometry nally above.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94

number
3.5 Rotate You select the view “from diagonally above”.

isometry
1. With the cursor keys, you rotate a displayed model (at
the bottom left in the graphics area)
2. You confirm the view with the INPUT key.
3.6 Set You change the sizes of the 4 windows relative to each
4 views other.
1. With the cursor keys, you position the crosshair (the
crosshair also shows how the screen is divided up)
2. You confirm the division with the INPUT key.
3.7 Activate The graphics area is divided into four windows. It con-
4 views sists of the plan view, side view, front view and DIN iso-
metry.
4 Screen Under this function, you apply the following functions to
the screen image in your graphics area
S Refresh
S Select a viewport
S Set this viewport
S Move the viewport
S Enter a viewport directly
S Change its setup (screen colour, text colour, colours
of interactive forms).
4.1 Refresh You refresh the screen image with its geometrical data in
the graphics area.
4.2 Select You zoom or reduce the workpiece geometry displayed.
viewport
4.3 Set The viewport created under 4.2 is defined for the further
viewport representation (also when the screen is refreshed).
4.4 Move You redefine the centre of the display.
viewport
1. With the cursor keys, position the crosshair to the
point in the graphic field which is to be the centre of
screen division.
2. With the INPUT key, confirm the new division.
Select Set viewport if this display centre point is to be
used as the initial representation.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix

number
4.5 Enter You enter the viewport directly. The following are the
viewport parameters:
Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax, Zmin, Zmax
4.6 Setup You change the screen colour, the text colour or the
colours of interactive forms with the functions
S Colour text
S Colour graphics
and save the modified setup.
4.6.1 Colour text
Below the graphics area, the corresponding number

codings for the individual colours are shown.
4.6.2 Colour
graphics
The number codings for the individual colours are shown

below the graphics area.
4.6.3 Save You save the new setup.
setup
5 Repre- You can display the workpiece geometry in various ways.
sentation You can select
S Coord. sys. on/off
S Dir. arrows on/off
S Dimension on/off
S All planes on/off
S Display plane selection

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
11.95

number
5.3 Coord. sys. You toggle between display/non-display of the coordinate

on/off system.
5.4 Dir. arrows You toggle between display/non-display of the direction
on/off arrows.
5.5 Dimensioning You toggle between display/non-display of scale of
on/off graphic field
5.6 All planes All defined planes are displayed in their respective views
on/off in the graphic area.
An “*” before the plane display identifies the display as
“All planes on”.
5.7 Display This gives you information about all the defined (created)
plane sel. planes (surfaces). The system displays the surfaces in a
selection screenform.
6 Program This function gives you information on
Info
S created elements with the Construction geometry
function1)
S the distance or angle between two construction geom-
etry elements1)
S created elements with the Oriented geometry func-
tion
S the distance or angle between two elements (created
with the function Oriented geometry)
S system status
S log function
6.1 Const. geo As soon as you have activated the Construction
element geometry1) function, you can view the parameters for
the element by selecting a construction geometry
element.
6.2 Const. geo As soon as you have activated the Construction
dist/angle geometry1) function, you can ask for the distance or
angle between two elements.
You select the elements individually.

6.3 Contour The Graphic Programming System shows you the para-
element meters of the geometry elements which you have gene-
rated with the Oriented geometry function.
You select the respective element.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix

number
6.4 Contour The graphic programming sysstem shows you the

dist/angle distance or angle between two associated geometry
elements.
You have generated the elements with the function

Oriented geometry.
You select the elements individually.

6.5 System This gives you information about the software version
status and about the workpiece.

You can select whether you want to program in the met-

ric or inch system in the selection field Input/output
system.
This interactive screenform also gives information about
the current tool magazine.
Note:
The toggled position in the Input/output system is not
stored on exiting WOP.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94

number
7 Program This function provides an overview of your program

steps steps. The program step headers are displayed.
The machining operations can be influenced under the
functions:
S Edit
S Insert
S Delete
S Move
S Inform (end face/peripheral surface programming)1)
S Recalculate
S Skip
Note: This function cannot be used with
geometries.
7.1 Edit The program step names and the individual program
steps for machining with their parameter assignment
forms (numeric parameters) can be modified.
7.2 Insert Program steps for machining are inserted in front of the
selected programming step.
7.2.1 Insert off You terminate the Insert function.
7.2.2 Insert The Insert function is continued.
7.3 Delete You delete the entire program step.
7.4 Move You move individual program steps in the work schedule.
7.5 Info1) You obtain information as to which program step belongs
to the tool motion paths shown in the graphics area1).
7.6 Recalculate The parameters which may have been changed and the
additions made for machining are recalculated.
The display of the updated geometry with its machining
is refreshed in the graphics field.
7.7 Skip You skip program steps from the work schedule or condi-
tionally insert them.
The program steps are not deleted.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3 End-face/peripheral surfaces
5.3 End-face/peripheral surfaces
The functions for end-face/peripheral surfaces

described below apply only when the C-axis option
is available.
5.3.1 Geometry
2
Geometry
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7
Create Copy Create Select Edit

Edit Delete
new contour surface surface surface
Edit or delete contours Selection of a surface

in graphic representa- from a list
tion by means of
selection control.
2.7.1 2.7.2
Change Delete
surface surface
2.1
2.5.1 2.5.2
From Free
turned part definition
2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5
Translate Mirror Reverse Scaling Parallel

Rotate mirror contour
1. Use selection control to graphically select contours.

2. Enter parameters in an interactive form.
Fig. 5.9 Functions Geometry (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry
2.1
Create
new
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5

Cycle
Blank Contour Groove Holes
ref. pt.
Interactive screenform 2.1.4 2.1.5
2.1.1.1 2.1.1.4 2.1.1.5. 2.1.1.6 2.1.1.7
Oriented Construct. Standard

geometry Abort OK
geometry geometry
Two interactive screenforms Blank/ Groove

2.1.1.4 Contour
2.1.1.5 2.1.3.5
2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 2.1.1.6 2.1.1.7

Oriented Edit
Abort OK
geometry elements
2.1.1.2.1 2.1.1.2.2 2.1.1.2.3
Change Erase Select

element element variants
1. Select element graphi- 1. Select element graphically

cally
2. Solutions computed by the
2. Parameter input in an programming system are
interactive screenform displayed.
2.1.1.1.1 2.1.1.1.2 2.1.1.1.3 2.1.1.1.4 2.1.1.1.5 2.1.1.1.6 2.1.1.1.7
Line Line Line Line Line Arc Arc

right left up down any left ccw right cw
The following applies for the geometry element to be constructed (line/arc):
1. Parameter inputs in an interactive screenform.

2. a: Displays of the solution (where there are two possible solutions, selection via softkey
menu).
b: The construction (display of the solution) of the element is solved by the programming
system with the parameters entered for the next element or the one after that.
Fig. 5.10 Functions Geometry/Create new (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry
2.1.1.4
Construction
geometry
Interactive 2.1
screenform
2.1.1.4.1 2.1.1.4.2 2.2.3 2.1.1.4.4 2.1.1.4.6 2.1.1.4.7

Construct. Contour Transition Modify
Abort OK
elements definition elements cont. def.
2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3

Create contours
graphically with the Delete
Chamfer Radius transition
selection control.
Edit or create transitions

graphically with the
selection control.
2.1.1.4.4 2.1.1.4.6 2.1.1.4.7
Modify
Abort OK
cont. def.
2.1.1.4.1.1 2.1.1.4.1.2 2.1.1.4.1.3 2.1.1.4.1.4 2.1.1.4.1.5 2.1.1.4.1.6 2.1.1.4.1.7

Row of Circle of Point Edit
Point Line Circle
points points box
Graphic construc-
tion of a user-de-
fined geometry.
2.1.1.4.1.7.1 2.1.1.4.1.7.2 2.1.1.4.1.7.3
Change Redefine Erase

parameter element element
Edit or create the contours

selection control.
Fig. 5.11 Functions Geometry/Create new/Construction geometry (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry
2.1.1.5
Standard
geometry
(blank/contour)
2.1
Interactive
screenform
2.1.1.5.1 2.1.1.5.2 2.1.1.5.3
Rectangle Circle n-corner
2.1.3.5
Standard
geometry
(groove)
2.1
Interactive
screenform
2.1.3.5.1 2.1.3.5.2 2.1.3.5.3 2.1.3.5.4 2.1.3.5.5 2.1.3.5.6
Rectang. Annular n-corner Radial Circumf.

Elong. hole
groove groove groove groove groove
Fig. 5.12 Functions Geometry/Create new/Standard geometry (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry
2.1.4
Holes
Interactive
screenform
2.1.4.1 2.1.4.2 2.1.4.3 2.1.4.4 2.1.4.5
Single Row of Circle of Hole Any hole

hole holes holes box pattern
Interactive
screenform
2.1.1.4.1 2.1.1.4.2 2.1.1.4.6 2.1.1.4.7

Construct. Define
Abort OK
elements pattern
Create the holes

selection control.
2.1.1.4.1.1 2.1.1.4.1.2 2.1.1.4.1.3 2.1.1.4.1.4 2.1.1.4.1.5 2.1.1.4.1.6 2.1.1.4.1.7
Point Line Circle Row of Circle of Point Edit

points points box
Graphic construc-
tion of a user-de- Interactive screenform
fined geometry.
2.1.1.4.1.7.1 2.1.1.4.1.7.2 2.1.1.4.1.7.3
Edit New Erase

parameter element element
Edit or create the con-

tours graphically with
the selection control.
Fig. 5.13 Functions Geometry/Create new/Holes (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry

number
S Create new
S Edit
S Delete
S Copy
S Create (define) surface
S Select surface
S Edit surface
2.1 Create You create the following types of geometry elements:
new
S Blank
S Contour
S Groove
S Holes
S Cycle ref. point
2.1.1 Blank You create the blank contour of the workpiece with speci-
fied material, workpiece reference plane and material
thickness using the functions:
S Oriented geometry
S Standard geometry
2.1.1.1 Oriented Join an oriented element (straight line, arc) to an
geometry oriented contour definition.
right
left
up
down
2.1.1.1.5 Line Generate an oriented line with a user-defined start angle.
any
2.1.1.1.6 Arc Generate an oriented arc counterclockwise (ccw).
left ccw

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.1.7 Arc Generate an oriented arc clockwise (cw).

right cw
2.1.1.2 Edit elements Edit the parameters of the selected element.
2.1.1.2.1 Change Change the numeric parameters of the selected oriented
element contour element.
2.1.1.2.2 Erase Erase the selected oriented contour element.
element
2.1.1.2.3 Select Select another construction variant if there are several
variant possible solutions.
2.1.1.4 Construction You construct a contour of your own choice by
geometry constructing elements (point, line, circle) and create a
contour on this. You make use of the functions:
S Const. geo elements
S Contour definition
S Element transition

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.4.1 Const. geo You always require reference elements for designing the
elements construction geometry. The first reference elements are
the X or Y axis as reference lines and the zero point as
construction reference point. Using the cursor keys, you
guide the crosshair and with the INPUT key you confirm
the selection of the reference elements. You do not
have to position the crosshair exactly. The system
finds the reference element that is closest to the cross-
hair.
The system supplies you with interactive screeforms into
which you enter the parameters for the elements.
When the construction has been completed, the system
computes several solutions. Select the solution you re-
quire with the crosshair and accept this by pressing the
INPUT key.
You can make use of circles, lines and points as con-
struction elements.
You generate these elements with the functions:
S Point
S Line
S Circle
S Row of points
S Circle of points
S Point box
S Edit construction geometry
2.1.1.4.1.1 Point You design a construction geometry point.
2.1.1.4.1.2 Line You design a construction line.
2.1.1.4.1.3 Circle You design a construction circle.
2.1.1.4.1.4 Row of points You design construction points on a line.
2.1.1.4.1.5 Circle of points You design construction points on a circle or circular arc.
2.1.1.4.1.6 Point box You design construction points on a filled or empty
parallelogram.
2.1.1.4.1.7 Edit You edit construction geometry elements with the
const. geo functions:
S Change parameter
S New construction element
S Delete construction element
2.1.1.4.1.7.1 Change You select an element (crosshair, keyboard) and change
parameter the parameters in the interactive screenform.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.1.1.4.1.7.2 New You select an element (crosshair, keyboard) and redefine

element it.
2.1.1.4.1.7.3 Erase You select an element (crosshair, keyboard) and delete
element it.
2.1.1.4.2 Contour You generate a user-defined workpiece contour by selec-
definition ting the construction elements (crosshair, keyboard). The
contour begins with an initial point and ends with an end
point. The initial point can also be identical with the end
point.
2.1.1.4.4 Modify You can correct the contour for the construction geome-
cont. def. try elements. Comments in the information line guide you
through the programming.
2.1.1.5 Standard You create the workpiece contour with specification of
geometry the start and end planes using the functions:
(blank/contour)
S Rectangle
S Circle
S n-corner
2.1.1.5.1 Rectangle You define a rectangular contour.
2.1.1.5.2 Circle You define a circular contour.
2.1.1.5.3 n-corner You define a contour with n-corners.
2.1.2 Contour You create the workpiece contour with specification of
the start and end planes using the functions:
S Oriented geometry
S Edit elements
S Standard geometry
2.1.3 Groove You create the workpiece groove contour with specifica-
tion of the start plane, end plane and groove width by
means of the functions:
S Oriented geometry
S Edit elements
S Standard geometry

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.1.3.5 Standard You create the groove contour of the workpiece with
Geometry specification of the start plane, end plane and width by
(Groove) using the following functions:
S Elongated hole
S Rectangular groove
S Annular groove
S n-corner groove
S Radial grooves
S Circumferential groove
2.1.3.5.1 Elongated hole You define an elongated hole.
2.1.3.5.2 Rectangular You define a rectangular groove.
groove
2.1.3.5.3 Annular You define an annular groove.
groove
2.1.3.5.4 n-corner You define a groove with n-corners.
croove
2.1.3.5.5 Radial You define radial grooves with groove length (SL), radius
grooves (R1), initial angle (A1), incremental angle (A2) and num-
ber of grooves (NS).
+Y SW NS
ÎÎ
A1
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ SL
ÎÎÎÎ
R1 A2
YP
ÎÎ
W XP +X

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.1.3.5.6 Circumferential You define a circumferential groove with the radius (RM),
groove opening angle (A2) and initial angle (A1).
+Y
SW
RM
A2
A1
+X
W
2.1.4 Holes You generate holes with specification of diameter and

depth by using the following functions:
S Single hole
S Row of holes
S Circle of holes
S Hole box
S Any hole pattern
2.1.4.1 Single hole You define the single hole.
2.1.4.2 Row of holes You define the row of holes.
2.1.4.3 Circle of holes You define the circle of holes.
2.1.4.4 Hole box You define the hole box.
2.1.4.5 Any hole You program a group of hole points. You design con-
pattern struction elements (point, line) and define on this a group
of hole points as a contour. You make use of the func-
tions:
S Construction geometry elements
S Define pattern
S Edit pattern
2.2 Edit You select a contour graphically and edit the parameters
directly in an interactive screenform.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.2.3 Transition You modify the corners of the workpiece contour using
elements the functions:
S Chamfer
S Rounding
S Delete
2.2.3.1 Chamfer You select a corner of the geometry and enter the value
for the chamfer.
2.2.3.2 Radius You select a corner of the geometry and enter the radius
for the rounding.
2.2.3.3 Delete You select a corner of the geometry and delete the tran-
transition sition element.
2.3 Delete You select a contour graphically and delete it after the
request for confirmation.
2.4 Copy You select contours graphically and generate modified
copies. The functions are:
S Translate and rotate
S Mirror
S Reverse mirror
S Scaling
S Parallel contour
2.4.1 Translate You copy selected contours by translation in the X, Y and
Rotate Z axes or you rotate the copied contours around an X/Y
point by a specified angle arount the Z axis.
2.4.2 Mirror You copy selected contours by mirroring about a straight
line which you define by means of a reference point and
an angle.
2.4.3 Reverse You copy selected contours as described under Mirror.
mirror In addition, the direction of machining of the mirrored
contour is inverted. This is important for generating
closed contours.
2.4.4 Scaling You copy selected contours. The copied contour is
magnified or reduced by the factor specified.
2.4.5 Parallel contour You define the parallel contour right or left by directly in-
putting a distance.
Note: The parallel contour can be applied to only one
contour.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.1 Geometry

number
2.5 Create (define) You create new surfaces which you can either define di-
surface rectly from the turned part or can define freely.
These surfaces are either
S an end face or
S a peripheral surface.
2.5.1 Form turned You select a geometry element that the system defines
part as an end face or a peripheral surface directly from the
created turned part as finished part.
2.5.2 Free definition You can create an end face or a peripheral surface
anywhere in the coordinate system independently of the
turned part.
2.6 Select surface You select the active plane for the next graphic program-
ming operations.
2.7 Edit surface The dimensions of created surface can be edited or de-
leted.
2.7.1 Change surface You change the parameters of a created surface.
2.7.2 Delete surface You delete a created surface.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.2 Machining
5.3.2 Machining
3
Machining
Interactive
screenform
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
Machine/ Insert Machining Part prog.

Milling Drilling
aux. fcts. block (DIN) simulation produce
1. Select function Interactive

2. Parameter input in the screenform
3.1
The programmed The programming
machining process is system generates
simulated schemat- NC blocks according
ically on the screen. to DIN.
3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5
Centre Counter- Bore to

Deep hole Thread
Drill sink DIN
3.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.5.1 3.2.5.2 3.2.5.3 3.2.5.4 3.2.5.5

Tool Value
Bore 1 Bore 2 Bore 3 Bore 4 Bore 5
selection input
A tool is selected
1. Select contours graphically with the selection control.
interactively with
the programming 2. Parameter input in an interactive screenform.
system.
Fig. 5.14 Functions Machining (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 5 Appendix
5.3.2 Machining
3.1
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5
Tool Contour Solid Manual Surface

selection milling milling milling milling
A tool is selected 1. Select contours graphically

1. Select contours
interactively with with the selection control
the programming 2. Parameter input in an
2. Parameter input into an inter-
system. interactive screen-
active screenform
form.
Select contour(s)
graphically
Contour of a Contour of an
Standard Oriented geometry
geometry or
Construction geometry
(1.) Graphically select initial

Graphically element
define start
point (2.) Graphically select end
element
Interactive
screenform
3.1.4.1 3.1.4.2 3.1.4.3 3.1.4.4 2.1.1.4.6 2.1.1.4.6

Rapid Numeric
Feed Undo Abort OK
traverse input
Fig. 5.15 Functions Milling (end-face/peripheral surface)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.2 Machining

number
chining plane. The available machining operations are
adapted to the active plane.
S Turning plane
– clamping
– turning
– concentric drilling
S Milling plane
– milling
– drilling
S Machine auxiliary functions
S Insert block (DIN)
3.1 Milling You choose a tool for the machining process and select
between the various milling functions:
S Tool selection
S Contour milling
S Solid milling
S Manual milling
S Surface milling
3.1.1 Tool From the loaded tool magazine, you select the tool
selection required for the planned machining process.
Having selected the tool, you can change the magazine
location (T No.) and the tool offset memory number (D
No.). The cutting values and the active tool offset switch
are influenced in the machining operations which follow
by means of the screenform for cutting values. The tool
data supplies default values here.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.2 Machining

number
3.1.2 Contour You machine selected contours with optional tool radius
milling compensation.
For machining a contour, you either use the standard
start point or define a manual start point.
Machining takes place
S along the contour, or
S with CRC adjacent to the contour.
For a contour that has been created under Oriented
geometry or Construction geometry, the following
parts can be machined:
S Closed contour
S Open contour
S Contour sections
The approach and retraction strategy can be selected as
required.
Depending on the parameterization, various strategies
can be used for depth infeed and machining direction. At
points where the tool cannot follow the contour, an alter-
native contour can be made up where no contour viola-
tion can occur with the selected tool (path compensa-
tion).
3.1.3 Solid You machine selected pockets with islands.
milling
3.1.4 Manual You can move the tool at rapid traverse rate or at feed-
milling rate either with the crosshair or by inputting coordinates.
Incorrectly entered movements can be cancelled. The
tool path is represented in the graphics area with the tool
width. The entire machining definition can be rejected by
the abort function. When entering coordinates (tool cen-
tre path) the current tool position provides the default
values. For these functions, you work with the crosshair
and the softkeys:
S Feed
S Rapid traverse
S Undo
S Numeric inputs
3.1.4.1 Feed You traverse the paths programmed after this at feed-
rate.
3.1.4.2 Rapid You position to the points programmed after this at the
traverse rapid traverse rate.
3.1.4.3 Undo You ignore the machining definition that has just been
executed and revert to the previous one.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.3.2 Machining

number
3.1.4.4 Numeric You enter the next tool position (cutter centre path)
inputs directly as coordinates (X/Y/Z).
3.1.5 Surface You machine the surface of the selected island and mill
milling selected pockets at the same time.
You machine the surface of a selected contour. You
select a suitable approach and retract strategy.
Machining always proceeds from the outside to the
inside. The paths are generated parallel to the contour.
Specified pockets are milled. All selected contours are
overtravelled by the degree of overlap.
Note: It is not possible to have an island on the
surface to be machined, nor is it possible to
machine the bottom of a pocket.
3.2 Drilling You select the drilling technology.
The system offers you the following drilling operations:
S Centre
S Countersink
S Deep hole
S Thread
S Bore to DIN
Having selected a tool if necessary, you select the hole
and parameterize an interactive screenform with the
technological parameters.
The drilling cycle operates with the value of the Depth of
the selected drilling geometry element and the empirical
values file (unless you have specified another depth).
3.2.1 Centre You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
Drill hole to be machined with cycle L81.
3.2.1.2 Value input You select the hole points and then enter the technologi-
cal parameters in an interactive screenform.
3.2.2 Countersink You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
hole to be machined with cycle L82.
3.2.3 Deep hole You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
3.2.4 Thread You select a tool for the thread and select graphically the

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.3.2 Machining

number
3.2.5 Bore to You can choose between several boring cycles

DIN (L85...L89).
3.2.5.1, 3.2.5.2, Bore 1...5 You select a tool for the hole and select graphically the
hole to be machined with cycle (L85...L89).
3.2.5.3, 3.2.5.4,
3.2.5.5
3.4 Machine/ You call up machine-specific auxiliary and switching
auxiliary functions. These functions can support user cycles or be
functions defined as programming system macro. These functions
have no reference to the geometry elements.
3.5 Insert block You initiate control-specific functions and enter freely
(DIN) programmable DIN blocks. This freely defined DIN code
is not checked by the control.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
09.96
5.3.3 Vertical softkey bar Drilling and Milling
Save 1
2.1
2 Read
Read original
1) 2.2
1) 3 3.1 Read
Views
Top autosave
view
4 4.1 3.2 2.3
Screen Refresh Side New
view
Repre- 5 4.2 3.3
sentation Select Front
viewport view
Program 6 6.1 4.3 3.4
Const. geo Set DIN
info
element viewport isometry
Program 7 7.1 6.2 5.3 4.4 3.5
steps Const. geo Coord. sys. Move Rotate
Edit on/off
dist/angle viewport isometry
7.2 6.3 5.4 4.5 3.6
Contour Dir. arrows Enter Set
Insert on/off 4 views
element viewport
6.4 5.5 4.6 3.7
7.3 Dimension Activate
Delete Contour Setup
dist/angle on/off 4 views
7.4 6.5 5.6
System All planes
Move on/off
status
7.5 5.7
Info Display
plane sel.
7.6
Recalculate
7.7 4.6.1
7.2.1 Colour
Skip Insert text
off
4.6.2
7.2.2 Colour
Insert graphics
4.6.3
Save
setup
Fig. 5.16 Functions Vertical softkey bar (end-face/peripheral surface)
1) Only the Views function is different for end faces and peripheral surfaces. For descriptions of the other functions, see
Section 5.2.4.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix

number
3 Views You can use the following views for displaying the work-
piece geometry:
S Top view
S Side view
S Front view
S DIN isometry
S Rotate isometry
S Set 4 views
S Activate 4 views
3.1 Top You change your workpiece view to plan view.
view
3.2 Side You change your workpiece view to side view from the
view right.
3.3 Front You change your workpiece view to front view.
view
3.4 DIN You change your workpiece view to top view from diago-
isometry nally above.
3.5 Rotate You select the view “from diagonally above”.
isometry
1. With the cursor keys, you rotate a displayed model (at
the bottom left in the graphics area)
2. You confirm the view with the INPUT key.
3.6 Set You change the sizes of the 4 windows relative to each
4 views other.
1. With the cursor keys, you position the crosshair (the
crosshair also shows how the screen is divided up)
2. You confirm the division with the INPUT key.
3.7 Activate The graphics area is divided into four windows. It con-
4 views sists of the plan view, side view, front view and DIN
isometry.

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4 Tool types
5.4 Tool types
5.4.1 Clamping
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L4
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L3
ÏÏ
L2
ÏÏ Ï L1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L8
L7
ÏÏ
ÏÏ L6
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
L5
D21
ÏÏÏÏ
Chuck jaw inside # 295
Fig. 5.17 Chuck jaw inside (3 steps)
ÏÏ
ÏÏ L4
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L3
ÏÏÏÏ
L2
L1
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
L5
ÏÏ L6
ÏÏÏ ÏÏ
L7
L8
D20
ÏÏÏÏ
Chuck jaw outside # 293
Fig. 5.18 Chuck jaw outside (3 steps)
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L4
ÏÏ
L3
ÏÏ ÏÏ L2
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L8
Ï ÏÏ
L7
L6
D21
ÏÏÏÏChuck jaw inside # 287
Fig. 5.19 Chuck jaw inside (2 steps)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.1 Clamping
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
L4
L3
ÏÏ
L2
ÏÏÏ L6
ÏÏ Ï
L7
L8
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
D20
ÏÏÏÏ
Fig. 5.20 Chuck jaw outside (2 steps)
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L4
L3
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
L8
L7
D21
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Chuck jaw inside # 294
Fig. 5.21 Chuck jaw inside (1 step)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ L4
L3
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
L7
L8
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
D20
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Fig. 5.22 Chuck jaw outside (1 step)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.1 Clamping
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
LZ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
D
LY
ÏÏ LX
# 291
Fig. 5.23 Tailstock
Ï L2
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ
A1 D1 A2 D2
ÏÏ L1
# 288
Fig. 5.24 Quill

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.2 Turning
5.4.2 Turning
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
+X
F
Ï +Z
Ï L
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Q
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
(12)
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ(13) (14) (15) HSW (11) (10)
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
# 277
SW
Fig. 5.25 Recessing tool, shank
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
+ –
+X HSW
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ
LSP
CMA
HSW
SW
ÏÏ ÏÏ
R
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
(12)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
CMI
(13) (14) (15)

BSP
HSW (11)
+Z
(10)
ÏÏ SW # 281
Fig. 5.26 Recessing tool, tool tip

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.2 Turning
ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
+X
+ –
HSW
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ LS
HSW SW
ÏÏÏ CMA
ÏÏ Ï ÏÏ CMI R +Z
# 278
Fig. 5.27 Rough-turning tool, tool tip
ÏÏ
BD
ÏÏ EL
# 273
Fig. 5.28 Rough-turning tool, shank
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
+X
Ï
F
+Z
Ï
L
Ï
Q
# 274

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.2 Turning
ÏÏÏÏ BS
Ï
ÏÏ SM
Ï
F
# 272
Ï ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
(1)
F
ÏÏ ÏÏ
F
Longitudinal
Cross/left
Cross/right
(1)
(2)
(3)
ÏÏ (2)
ÏÏÏ (3)
ÏF
#270
Fig. 5.31 Rough-turning tool, holder
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
F FV1
FV1
ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ
(3)
L1 L1
ÏÏ
(1)
F
ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ L2 L2
ÏÏ ÏÏ Ï
L2
Ï
F
L1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
FV1
(2)
# 271
Fig. 5.32 Rough-turning tool, holder

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.2 Turning
HSW
+ –
HSW
EL
R SW
CMA
CM3
HSW
HSW
R
SW
SW
Fig. 5.33 Turning tool (button)
SW
ST
R
CMA
T
CMA
SW
R
T
ST
Fig. 5.34 Thread cutter

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.3 Drill
5.4.3 Drill
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ DS1
ÏÏ LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LS DT1
AT1
ÏÏ LT1
LT2
DT2
# 151
Fig. 5.35 Centre drill
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
LS1
DS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LS
DT1
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LE
# 150
Fig. 5.36 NC spot drill
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
LS1
DS1
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
LS
DT1
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LE
# 150
Fig. 5.37 Twist drill

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.3 Drill
ÏÏÏÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
LS
DT1
ÏÏ
LT1
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ AT1 = 180°
ÏÏÏ
LE = 0
# 176
Fig. 5.38 Solid drill
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS
DT5
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LC1
ÏÏ
LE
ÏÏ
DT2
DT1
# 152
Fig. 5.39 Metric ISO regular tap
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ DT5
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LC1
LE
ÏÏ DT2
ÏÏ DT1
# 152
Fig. 5.40 Metric ISO fine tap

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.3 Drill
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DT5
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LC1
LE
ÏÏ DT2
ÏÏ DT1
# 152
Fig. 5.41 Whitworth tap
ÏÏÏÏÏ DS1 LS1
Ï ÏÏÏ
LS
DT5
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
LT1
LC1
ÏÏ DT1
# 165
Fig. 5.42 Counterbore without pilot
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS DT5
ÏÏ
LT1
ÏÏ LC1
LE
ÏÏ
DT2
DT1
# 177
Fig. 5.43 Counterbore with pilot

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.3 Drill
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
DT5
LS
ÏÏ
AT1
LT1
LC1
ÏÏ
DT2
DT1 # 157
Fig. 5.44 Countersink
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LS
DT5
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
LT1
AT1 LC1
ÏÏ DT2
ÏÏ
LE
DT1
# 156
Fig. 5.45 Reamer
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ LS
ÏÏ ÏÏ DT5
LT1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LC1
DT1
# 159
Fig. 5.46 Boring rod 1

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
5.4.3 Drill
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
DT5
ÏÏ LS
LT1
LE
DT1
LC1 # 160
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
DS1
ÏÏ
LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ LS
ÏÏ
DT5
LT1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ LE
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
DT1
LC1
ÏÏ AT1 # 161
ÏÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS
DT5
LT1
ÏÏ
DT1
LC1
# 158

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
5.4.4 Milling cutters
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
DS1 LS1
LSÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
DT5
ÏÏÏÏ
LT1
LC1
CR
DT1
ÏÏ
LS LT1
LC1
CR
DT1
# 155
Fig. 5.50 End mill
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ DT5
ÏÏ
LS
ÏÏ
ÏÏ CR
LC1
LT1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ DT1
# 179
Fig. 5.51 Shell end mill

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
DT5
LS
ÏÏ
ÏÏ LC1
LT1
CR
DT1
# 180
Fig. 5.52 Slotting mill
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS
DT5
LT1
CR LC1
ÏÏ DT1
#178
Fig. 5.53 T-slot cutter

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ
DT5
LS
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LT1
LT2
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ DT1
LC1
AT1
# 154
Fig. 5.54 Face mill
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LS
ÏÏ DT5
AT1 = 90°
ÏÏ
LT1
LT2
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ DT1
LC1
# 173
Fig. 5.55 Corner mill (90 degrees)
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
Ï ÏÏ ÏÏ
LS DT5
ÏÏ
ÏÏ LT1
ÏÏ CR LC1
ÏÏ

DT1
AT1= –
# 174
Fig. 5.56 Angle mill (A)

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94 5 Appendix
ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
AT1 = +
ÏÏLS
ÏÏ
DT5
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
LT1
LC1
CR
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
DT1
DT2 # 175
Fig. 5.57 Angle mill (B)
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
DS1 LS1
ÏÏ
LS
ÏÏ
DT5
ÏÏ LC1
LT1
ÏÏ
DT1
# 171
Fig. 5.58 Side mill
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ DS1 LS1
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ
DT5
LS
ÏÏ LT1
ÏÏ DT1 LC1
# 172
Fig. 5.59 Circular mill

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
5 Appendix 08.94
03.95
5.5 Model for turning with C-axis option
5.5 Model for turning with C-axis option
To obtain a model for turning with C-axis option, you can

S photocopy the diagram below onto cardboard,
S cut it out and
S assemble it.
PERIPHERAL SURFACE
FACE END

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 6 Index
6 Index
A Contour elements, 4–71
Contour grooving, 4–152, 5–21
absolute, 4–72 Contour milling, 4–166, 5–45
Accept, 5–7 contour direction, 4–168
All, 4–58, 4–121, 5–6, 5–21 oriented geometry, 4–167
All planes on/off, 5–26 part contours, 4–178
Angle definition, 4–92 standard geometry, 4–167
Angle indications, 4–74 start point standard, 4–167
Annular groove, 5–38 Contour transition elements, 4–74
Any hole pattern, 5–39 Control concept
Approach contour, 4–135 select, 3–7
Approach distance, 4–170 selection form, 3–3
Approach strategy, 4–128, 4–169 Copy, 4–88, 5–9
Axis designations, 4–39 Copy contour, 5–14
Countersink, 5–21, 5–46
Create surface, 4–42
B Cutoff, 4–149, 5–17, 5–21
Beginning of program, 4–114 Cutting, off, 5–21
Blank, 5–34 Cutting direction, 4–122
Bore to DIN, 5–47 Cutting values, 4–61, 4–127, 4–168
Cylinder, 4–67, 4–87, 5–10, 5–14
C
D
Cartesian, 4–73
D number, 4–52, 4–58, 4–121, 5–21
Centre, 5–21
Data from magazine, 4–66
Centre drill, 5–46
Deactivate, 5–18
Change tool, All, T and D number, Geometry
Deep hole, 5–21, 5–46
data, Technology, 4–58
Define hole pattern, 4–109
Chuck jaw
Define point elements, 4–109
inside, 5–50
DIN isometry, 5–23, 5–49
outside, 5–50
Display plane selection, 5–26
Circle definition, 4–98
Drilling, 5–21, 5–46
Circle of holes, 5–39
Circumferential groove, 5–39
Clamping, 5–18
E
Collision check, 4–160
Colours, 4–75 Edit, 5–7
Construction geometry, 4–90, 4–91, 5–35 contour, 5–14, 5–39
angle definition, 4–92 elements, 4–77
circle definition, 4–98 Editing contour elements, 4–77
line definition, 4–95 Elongated hole, 5–38
oriented geometry, 4–167 Empirical values, 4–2
point definition, 4–93 End, 5–3
Contour, 5–37 End angle SEA, 4–144
copy, 5–40 End face, 4–46
delete, 5–14, 5–40 End face/peripheral surface machining,
edit, 5–14, 5–39 4–164
Contour definition, 5–37 End of program, 4–46
Contour definition end, 5–15 End plane, 4–174

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
6 Index 08.94
09.96
EX (End point X), EZ (End point Z), 4–73 H

Help function, 2–1
texts, 2–1
Hole box, 5–39
F Hole points, concealing, 4–109
Holes, 4–108, 5–39
Face, 4–122 create, 4–108
Face finishing, 5–20
Face parallel to contour, 5–19
Face recessing, 5–20
Face roughing, 5–19 I
Facing thread, 5–20 ID number, 4–53, 4–121, 5–21
Feedrate, in percent, 4–66 INCH, 5–13
Finish cut, 5–17 incremental, 4–72
Finished part, 5–14 Infeed depth IF, 4–174
Finished part contour, 4–142 INFO, system status, 5–27
Finishing, 5–19 Info, 5–26
Following operation, 4–133 Information fields, 4–73
Form elements, 4–79, 5–12 Information line, 4–75
Form turned part, 5–15 Initial angle SSA, 4–144
Free definition, 4–42, 5–15 Initial point, 4–70
From finished part, 5–10, 5–14 Input fields, 4–73
From turned part, 4–43 Insert blocks, 4–195, 5–47
Front view, 5–23, 5–49 unassigned DIN code, 4–196
Insert length EL, 4–56
Island height, 4–191
G
K
Geometry, 4–67, 5–2, 5–11, 5–17, 5–34
create new, 5–11, 5–34 Key functions, 3–9, 3–10
end–face/peripheral surfaces, 5–29 crosshair, 3–7
turning, 5–8 interactive screenform, 3–4
Geometry data, 4–58, 4–121, 5–21 other, 3–11
Geometry end face/peripheral, 4–90
Global contour transitions, 4–69
Graphic programming, 4–37 L
Groove, 4–110, 5–37
annular groove, 5–38 Lifting, 4–189
circumferential groove, 5–39 Lifting angle, 4–129
elongated hole, 5–38 Lifting dimension, 4–129
n–corner groove, 5–38 Limitation points, 4–142
radial groove, 5–38 Line definition, 4–95
rectangular groove, 5–38 Longit. grooving, 5–20
standard groove, 5–20 Longitudinal, 4–122
Grooving, 5–17, 5–20 Longitudinal finishing, 5–19
face recessing, 5–20 Longitudinal parallel to contour, 5–19
finish, 5–20 Longitudinal roughing, 5–19
longit. grooving, 5–20 Longitudinal section, 5–23
rough, 5–20 Longitudinal section P, 5–23
rough/fin. grooving, 5–20 Longitudinal thread, 5–20
Grooving technology, 4–148 Lowering, 4–188

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 6 Index
M milling, 5–42
oriented geometry, 5–10, 5–30
standard geometry, 5–30, 5–32
Machine and auxiliary functions, 4–194 tools material, 5–4
Machine plane, 4–114 turning, 5–8, 5–16
Machining, 4–111, 5–2, 5–18, 5–44 vertical, 5–22, 5–48
drilling technology, 4–192 Milling, 4–165, 5–44
end–face/peripheral surfaces, 5–42 contour milling, 4–166
machine and auxiliary functions, 4–194 manual milling, 4–182
milling technology, 4–165 solid milling, 4–186
contour milling, 4–166 surface milling, 4–180
manual milling, 4–182 Minimum hole diameter, 4–56
solid milling, 4–186 Minimum hole diameter HD, 4–56
surface milling, 4–180 Mirror, 5–40
turning, 5–16 Modify cont. def., 5–37
Machining definitions, 4–123 Move, 5–18
Magazine Move rotate, 5–14
load, 5–5
new, 5–5
save, 5–5 N
tool master data, 4–113, 4–164
user magazine, 4–113 n–corner, 4–107, 5–37
Manual milling, 4–182, 5–45 Narrow point offset, 4–176
Master data, 4–51, 4–113, 4–164
extend, 4–54
load, 5–5 O
magazine, 5–5
Offset direction, 4–144
Masterdata, save, 5–5
Offset value OV, 4–143
Material, data, 5–7
Operating concept
change, 5–7
crosshair, 3–6
save, 5–7
information line, 3–6
Materials, 4–61
initial or end point, 3–8
Menu tree, geometry, turning, 5–8
select, 3–6
Menu tree
Operation, 3–1
blank, 4–41, 5–10, 5–30
Operator control concept
clamping, 5–16
continuation form, 3–2
construct. geometry, 5–30
interactive screenform, 3–2
construction geometry, 5–31
Oriented geometry, 4–68, 5–11, 5–34
contour, 4–41, 5–30
edit elements, 4–77
create new, 5–10, 5–30
insert elements, 4–75
cycle ref. pt., 5–30
select variant, 4–77
drilling, 5–42
edit elements, 5–10, 5–30
finished part, 4–41, 5–10
P
form elements, 5–10
geometry, 5–8, 5–17, 5–29 Parallel contour, 5–40
end–face/peripheral surfaces, 5–29 Part program, 4–46, 4–196, 4–202
groove, 4–41, 5–30 create, 5–3
holes, 4–41, 5–30, 5–33 edit, 4–203
horizontal, 5–1 Peripheral surface, 4–46
machining, 5–16, 5–42 Plane position, 4–117
end–face/peripheral surfaces, 5–42 Pocket calculator, 4–218
turning, 5–16 Point definition, 4–93

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
6 Index 08.94
09.96
Polar, 4–73 Retraction from contour, 4–136

Position - change of plane, 4–45 Reverse mirror, 5–40
Program info, 5–26 Rotate (copy), 5–40
Program information Rotate isometry, 5–24, 5–49
const. geo dist/angle, 5–26 Rough grooving, 5–20
const. geo element, 5–26 Rough–turning tool
contour dist/angle, 5–27 holder, 5–55
contour element, 5–26 shank, 5–54, 5–55
Program steps, 4–204, 5–28 tool tip, 5–54
conceal, 4–216 Roughing, 5–17, 5–19
delete, 4–212, 5–28 Rounding, chamfer, 4–74
edit, 4–208, 5–28 Row of holes, 5–39
info, 4–214, 5–28
insert, 4–210, 5–28
move, 4–213, 5–28
recalculate, 4–215, 5–28 S
skip, 5–28
Programming for a vertical boring and tur- Safety clearance, 4–129, 4–170
ning mill, 4–47 Safety distance, 4–169
Programming functions, 4–1 Safety plane, 4–170
empirical values, 4–2 Save, 4–217, 5–23
geometry, 4–68 Save setup, 5–25
graphic programming, 4–37 Scaling, 5–40
grooving technology, 4–148 Screen, 5–24
machining, 4–111 colour graphics, 5–25
programming for a vertical boring and tur- colour text, 5–25
ning mill, 4–47 enter viewport, 5–25
technology drilling, 4–158 move viewport, 5–24
thread cutting, 4–155 refresh, 5–24
tools, 4–51 representation, 5–25
coordination system on/off, 5–26
dimensioning on/off, 5–26
Q direction arrows on/off, 5–26
Quill, 5–52 select viewport, 5–24
set viewport, 5–24
setup, 5–25
Secondary cutting edge, 4–140
R
Select surface, 4–45, 5–2
Radial grooves, 5–38 Select variant, 4–77
Read, 5–23 Selection control, 3–6
auto save, 4–217, 5–23 contour, 3–8
new, 5–23 crosshair, 3–6
original, 5–23 initial or end point, 3–8
Recess, 4–80, 5–12 with cursor keys, 3–7
Recessing tool without operator guidance, 3–10
shank, 5–53 Selection field, 3–2
tool dip, 5–53 Side view, 5–49
Reclamping, 5–18 Simulation, 5–3
Rectangle, 5–37 Simulation WOP, 4–198
Rectangular groove, 5–38 Single hole, 5–39
Refresh, 5–24 Skip, NC blocks, 4–194
Relief cutting, 4–130 Solid milling, 4–186, 5–45
Restrict finished part, 4–131 Speed max., 4–115

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
08.94
09.96 6 Index
Standard geometry, 4–90, 4–107 Tool selection, 4–117, 5–18, 5–21, 5–44
blank/contour, 5–37 functions, 4–121
groove, 5–38 Tool types, 5–50
Standard groove, 5–17 clamping, 5–50
Start plane, 4–174 drill, 5–57
Start point contour milling, 4–167 boring rod 1, 5–60
Stock removal parameters, 4–127 boring rod 2, 5–61
Stock removal segment, 4–141 boring rod 3, 5–61
Stock removal strategy, 4–127, 4–131 boring rod 4, 5–61
Strategy, path milling (contour milling), centre drill, 5–57
4–176 counterbore with pilot, 5–59
Surface counterbore without pilot, 5–59
alter, 4–44 countersink, 5–60
change, 5–15 fine tap, 5–58
create, 4–41 NC spot drill, 5–57
create (define), 5–15 reamer, 5–60
delete, 4–44, 5–15 regular tap, 5–58
edit, 4–44, 5–15 solid drill, 5–58
free definition, 4–42 twist drill, 5–57
from turned part, 4–43 Whitworth tap, 5–59
select, 5–15 milling cutter, 5–62
Surface milling, 4–180, 5–46 angle mill (A), 5–64
angle mill (B), 5–65
circular mill, 5–65
corner mill (90 degrees), 5–64
T end mill, 5–62
face mill, 5–64
T number, 4–52, 4–58, 4–121, 5–21 shell end mill, 5–62
Tailstock, 5–52 side mill, 5–65
Taper thread, 5–20 slotting mill, 5–63
Technology, 4–58 T–slot cutter, 5–63
Thread, 4–83, 5–13, 5–46 quill, 5–52, 5–56
undercut, 5–21 turning, recessing tool, 5–53
form A, 5–13 turning tool, rough turning tool, 5–54
form B, 5–13 turning tools, 5–53
Thread cutter, 5–56 thread cutter, 5–56
Thread cutting, 4–155, 5–17, 5–20 Tools, 4–51
Thread undercut, 5–17 copy, 4–57
TOA data for grooving, 4–148 cutting values, 4–61
Tool, 5–5 materials, 4–61
change, 5–6 Tools and material, 5–2
classes, 4–59 Tools material, 5–4, 5–5
copy, 5–6 Top view, 5–49
delete, 5–7 Transition elements, 5–40
direction of machining, 4–125 Translate, 5–40
machining location, 4–125 Turning, 5–17, 5–19
new, 5–6 magazine, 4–113
position, 4–124 operating sequences, 4–116
Tool change point, 4–117 operations, 4–112
Tool nose radius, 4–142 Turning plane, 4–46
Tool position, 4–175 Turning tool, 5–56

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)
6 Index 08.94
09.96
U Viewport
enter, 5–25
Undercut, 4–81 move, 5–24
face, 5–13 select, 5–24
form E, 5–12 set, 5–24
form F, 5–12 Views, 5–23, 5–49
longitudinal, 5–13 activate 4 views, 5–24, 5–49
User magazine, 4–51, 4–113 DIN isometry, 5–23, 5–49
create (new), 4–56 front view, 5–23, 5–49
longitudinal section, 5–23
longitudinal section P, 5–23
rotate isometry, 5–24, 5–49
V set 4 views, 5–24, 5–49
side view, 5–49
V1220, 4–117
top view, 5–49
V1221, 4–117
V1365, 4–148
V1366, 4–124
W
V1367, 4–123, 4–124, 4–126
V1380, 4–118 Withdrawal clearance, 4–170
V1394, 4–148 WOP, exit, 4–224
V1407, 4–79 WOP file environment, 4–1
V1432, 4–160 Work schedule, 4–204
V1433, 4–162 Workholder, 5–7
V1434, 4–56 classes, 4–59
Value input, 5–21, 5–46 copy, 5–7
Value input for diameter, 4–73 delete, 5–7
Vertical softkey bar, 5–22 modify, 5–7
Vertical softkey menu, drilling and miling, new, 5–7
5–48 Workholders, 4–115

SINUMERIK 840C (BN)

Wop d2#

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wop d2#

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Graphic Programming System

General Documentation User/Manufacturer/

Brochure Catalog NC 36 Catalog NC Z Link to SINEC L2-DP with

840/840C/ 840/840C/ 840/840C/

Manufacturer Documentation Service Documentation

840C 840/840C/ 840/840C/ 840/840C/

Graphic Programming System

Control Software Version Appendix 5

Status code in the “Remarks” column:

Edition Order No. Remarks

This publication was produced with Interleaf V 5.3

Subject to changes without prior notice.

 Siemens AG 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996. All rights reserved.

Order No. 6FC5198–6AA40–0BP1 Siemens–Aktiengesellschaft

The documentation for your Graphic Programming System is divided

This User’s Guide does not contain a detailed des-

Section 4: Provides information on the functions of the Graphic Programming Sys-

Section 5: Provides an overview of the menu trees of the Graphic Programming

2 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

3.1 Interactive screenform control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

4 Programming Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4.1 File environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

5.1 Tools Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 1–1

Help in the Graphic

Fig. 2.1 Help texts

The designations F1 to F7 (see Fig. 2.1) refer to the softkeys of the

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 2–1

Close help screen

by pressing the RECALL key.

Fig. 2.2 Graphic help

The parameters in the graphic help screenforms are marked white.

2–2  Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40

Fig. 2.3 Example: help graphics for creating a geometry

Interactive screenform Graphic help

1) Only possible with the C-axis option

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 2–3

The Graphic Programming System gives you further

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 3–1

3.1 Interactive screenform control

Parameters are required for programming the workpiece or the tools.

Fig. 3.1 Interactive screenform control

3–2  Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40

Fig. 3.2 Selection form

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 3–3

Key functions for in-

The CLEAR key deletes the

With this key, you move for-

The RECALL key ends interac-

3–4  Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40

With this key or key combination

If the cursor is on a text selection

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40 3–5

3.2 Selection control

Init. point Init. point [ † ],

Fig. 3.3 Selection control with crosshair

As the display shows, the operator guidance text in the Information

3–6  Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved 6FC5198–VAA40

Key functions for

Function in interactive screen-

By pressing the INPUT key, you

S selecting the contour with or

S moving and selecting the initial point or

S end point on a contour with .